Ford - Galaxy - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

FORD GALAXY / S-MAX Owner's Manual The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2012 All rights reserved. Part Number: CG3533en 04/2012 20120208091856 Table of Contents Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45 Introduction About This Manual...........................................7 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Replacement Parts Recommendation.........................................7 Alarm Principle of Operation..................................46 Arming the alarm...........................................48 Disarming the alarm.....................................48 At a Glance At a Glance........................................................10 Steering Wheel Child Safety Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49 Audio Control..................................................49 Child Seats........................................................22 Booster Seats..................................................23 Child Seat Positioning..................................24 ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27 Child Safety Locks.........................................28 Wipers and Washers Windscreen Wipers........................................51 Autowipers.........................................................51 Windscreen Washers....................................52 Adjusting the windscreen washer jets...................................................................52 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52 Headlamp Washers.......................................52 Checking the Wiper Blades........................53 Changing the Wiper Blades........................53 Technical Specifications.............................54 Occupant protection Principle of Operation..................................29 Fastening the seat belts...............................31 Seat belt height adjustment......................32 Seat belt reminder.........................................32 Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33 Disabling the passenger airbag................33 Lighting Lighting Control..............................................55 Daytime Running Lamps............................56 Autolamps........................................................56 Automatic Main Beam Control.................56 Front Fog Lamps.............................................57 Rear Fog Lamps.............................................58 Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With: Adaptive Front Lighting/Xenon Headlamps...................................................58 Headlamp Levelling......................................58 Adaptive Headlamps....................................59 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................60 Direction Indicators........................................61 Interior Lamps..................................................61 Removing a Headlamp................................63 Changing a Bulb.............................................64 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio Frequencies..................................................35 Programming the remote control............35 Changing the remote control battery............................................................35 Locks Locking and Unlocking.................................38 Global Opening and Closing.....................40 Keyless Entry.....................................................41 Engine immobiliser Principle of Operation..................................45 Coded keys.......................................................45 Arming the engine immobiliser................45 1 Table of Contents Bulb Specification Chart..............................72 Convenience features Sun Shades.....................................................135 Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................136 Clock..................................................................136 Cigar Lighter....................................................137 Ashtray..............................................................137 Auxiliary Power Points................................137 Cup Holders....................................................138 Glove Box.........................................................138 Storage compartments.............................139 Map Pockets..................................................140 Seat Back Trays............................................140 Glasses Holder................................................141 Memory Function..........................................141 Childminder Mirror.......................................142 CD changer......................................................142 Auxiliary Input Socket.................................142 USB Port..........................................................142 Floor Mats........................................................143 Windows and Mirrors Power Windows..............................................74 Exterior Mirrors................................................76 Electric exterior mirrors................................76 Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................77 Rear Quarter Windows.................................78 Blind Spot Monitor.........................................79 Instrument Cluster Gauges...............................................................82 Warning Lamps and Indicators................84 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............87 Information Displays General Information.....................................88 Trip Computer..................................................97 Personalised Settings..................................99 Information Messages.................................101 Starting and Stopping the Engine Climate Control Principle of Operation...................................111 Air Vents.............................................................111 Manual Climate Control..............................112 Automatic Climate Control........................114 Heated Windows and Mirrors...................119 Auxiliary Heater..............................................119 General Information....................................144 Ignition Switch...............................................144 Keyless Starting............................................144 Steering Wheel Lock...................................146 Starting a Petrol Engine.............................147 Starting a Petrol Engine - E85.................148 Starting a Diesel Engine.............................148 Diesel Particulate Filter..............................149 Switching Off the Engine..........................149 Engine Block Heater....................................149 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position..................125 Manual Seats.................................................125 Power Seats....................................................126 Head Restraints.............................................128 Rear Seats.......................................................128 Heated Seats..................................................133 Ventilated Seats............................................133 Front Seat Armrest......................................134 Start-Stop Principle of Operation..................................151 Using start-stop.............................................151 Eco Mode Principle of Operation.................................153 2 Table of Contents Using Eco mode............................................153 Parking Aid......................................................174 Fuel and Refuelling Rear view camera Safety Precautions......................................154 Fuel Quality - Petrol....................................154 Fuel Quality - E85........................................154 Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................154 Catalytic Converter......................................155 Fuel filler flap.................................................155 Refuelling.........................................................157 Refuelling - E85.............................................157 Fuel Consumption........................................157 Technical Specifications............................157 Principle of Operation.................................176 Rear View Camera........................................176 Cruise Control Principle of Operation.................................179 Using Cruise Control....................................179 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Transmission Principle of Operation..................................181 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................182 Forward alert function...............................186 Manual Transmission..................................162 Automatic Transmission............................162 Speed Limiter Brakes Principle of Operation.................................187 Using the speed limiter...............................187 Principle of Operation.................................165 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes...........................................................165 Parking Brake.................................................165 Electric Parking Brake.................................166 Driver Alert Principle of Operation................................189 Using driver alert..........................................189 Lane Departure Warning Stability Control Principle of Operation..................................191 Using lane departure warning..................191 Principle of Operation................................169 Using Stability Control...............................169 Load Carrying Hill Start Assist General Information....................................193 Luggage Anchor Points..............................194 Sliding Loadspace Floor............................196 Rear Under Floor Storage..........................197 Cargo Nets......................................................198 Luggage Covers.............................................201 Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................201 Load Retaining Fixtures............................203 Dog Guard......................................................207 Principle of Operation.................................170 Using hill start assist...................................170 Active suspension Principle of Operation.................................173 Using active suspension.............................173 Parking Aids Principle of Operation.................................174 3 Table of Contents Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma).......................................................242 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)............242 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)............................................................242 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel............................................................242 Engine Oil Check..........................................243 Engine Coolant Check...............................243 Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................244 Power Steering Fluid Check....................244 Washer Fluid Check....................................245 Technical Specifications...........................245 Towing Towing a Trailer.............................................210 Tow Ball...........................................................210 Retractable tow ball....................................213 Driving Hints Running-In.......................................................217 Cold Weather Precautions.........................217 Driving Through Water................................217 Roadside Emergencies First Aid Kit......................................................218 Warning Triangle...........................................218 Fuses Fuse Box Locations......................................219 Changing a Fuse..........................................220 Fuse Specification Chart............................221 Vehicle Care Cleaning the Exterior..................................248 Cleaning the Interior...................................249 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............249 Vehicle recovery Towing Points...............................................230 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......230 Vehicle battery Jump-Starting the Vehicle.......................250 Changing the Vehicle Battery...................251 Battery connection points.........................251 Maintenance General Information....................................232 Opening and Closing the Bonnet...........232 Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)............................................234 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)....................................235 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)..................................................236 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)....................................237 Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel.................238 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel................239 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................241 Wheels and Tyres General Information...................................252 Changing a Road Wheel...........................252 Temporary Mobility Kit..............................255 Tyre Care.........................................................259 Using Winter Tyres......................................259 Using Snow Chains.....................................259 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..........259 Technical Specifications............................261 Vehicle identification Vehicle Identification Plate......................264 Vehicle Identification Number................265 4 Table of Contents Capacities and Specifications Compact Disc Player Loading compact discs.............................285 Track selection.............................................285 Loading the compact disc changer......285 Unloading the compact disc changer.......................................................286 Compact disc playback............................286 Fast forward/reverse..................................286 Shuffle/random...........................................286 Compact disc track compression..........287 Compact disc track scanning..................287 Ejecting compact discs.............................287 Repeat compact disc tracks...................288 MP3 file playback........................................288 MP3 display options...................................289 Ending compact disc playback..............289 Technical Specifications..........................266 Audio introduction Important audio information..................270 Audio unit overview Audio unit overview......................................271 Audio System Security Security code.................................................274 Lost security code........................................274 Entering a security code............................274 Incorrect security code...............................274 Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket Setting the clock and date on the audio unit.................................................................275 Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket.............290 Audio unit operation Audio Troubleshooting On/off control...............................................276 Bass/treble control.....................................276 Balance/fade control.................................276 Audio menu control....................................276 Station preset buttons...............................278 Waveband button........................................278 Autostore control.........................................278 Traffic information control.......................279 Station tuning control...............................280 Audio troubleshooting................................291 Telephone General Information...................................292 Bluetooth setup...........................................292 Telephone setup..........................................292 Telephone controls.....................................293 Using the telephone - Vehicles Without: Navigation System.................................294 Using the telephone - Vehicles With: Navigation System.................................296 Audio unit menus Automatic volume control.......................282 Digital signal processing (DSP).............282 Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........282 Alternative frequencies.............................283 Regional mode (REG)...............................283 News broadcasts.........................................284 Voice control Principle of Operation...............................299 Using voice control.....................................299 Audio unit commands..............................300 Telephone commands..............................309 Navigation system commands...............314 5 Table of Contents Climate control commands.....................314 Connectivity General Information.....................................317 Connecting an external device................318 Connecting an external device - Vehicles With: Bluetooth.........................................318 Using a USB device......................................319 Using an iPod..................................................321 Navigation introduction Road Safety...................................................325 Navigation system Getting started.............................................326 Appendices Type approvals.............................................328 Type approvals.............................................328 Type approvals.............................................328 Type approvals.............................................329 Electromagnetic compatibility...............330 6 Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL CAUTION You risk damaging your vehicle if you do not follow the instructions highlighted by the caution symbol. Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. Symbols on your vehicle WARNING Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle. When you see these symbols, read and follow the relevant instructions in this handbook before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle. REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models, so may appear different to your vehicle. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct. Now you can be sure that your Ford parts are Ford parts Your Ford has been built to the highest standards using high quality Ford Original Parts. As a result, you can enjoy driving it for many years. Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. Should the unexpected occur and a major part needs replacing, we recommend that you accept nothing less than Ford Original Parts. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY The use of Ford Original Parts ensures that your vehicle is repaired to its pre-accident condition and maintains its maximum residual value. Symbols in this handbook WARNING Ford Original Parts match Ford's stringent safety requirements and high standards of fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply, they represent the best overall repair value, including parts and labour costs. You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instructions highlighted by the warning symbol. 7 Introduction Exterior mirror Now it is easier to tell if you have really been given Ford Original Parts. The Ford logo is clearly visible on the following parts if they are Ford Original Parts. If your vehicle has to be repaired, look for the clearly visible Ford branding and make sure that only Ford Original Parts have been used. Look for the Ford logo on the following parts Sheet metal • • • • Wing Bonnet Doors Luggage compartment lid or tailgate E94716 Glass • • • • E94714 Bumper and radiator grille • • Radiator grille Front and rear bumper 8 Rear window Glass roof Side glass Windscreen Introduction E94717 E94718 Lighting • • Rear lamps Headlamp 9 At a Glance Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive A E74123 B C D E W V U F T G S 10 H R I Q J K P L M O N At a Glance Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive N E75798 M P K L I O J Q H W C D V U E T F S G B A R A Lighting controls. See Lighting Control (page 55). B Air vents. See Air Vents (page 111). C Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 61). Telephone control buttons. See Telephone controls (page 293). Voice control buttons. See Using voice control (page 299). Lane departure warning control buttons. See Lane Departure Warning (page 191). D Audio controls. See Audio Control (page 49). E Instrument cluster. See Gauges (page 82). F Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 88). G Wiper lever. See Windscreen Wipers (page 51). 11 At a Glance H Audio unit. See Audio unit overview (page 271). H Navigation unit. See separate handbook. I Stability control (ESP) switch. See Using Stability Control (page 169). Start-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 151). J Parking aid switch. See Parking Aid (page 174). K Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 60). L Passenger airbag deactivation warning lamp. See Disabling the passenger airbag (page 33). M Storage compartment. See Storage compartments (page 139). N Heated windscreen and heated rear window switches. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 119). O Climate controls. See Manual Climate Control (page 112). See Automatic Climate Control (page 114). P Cigar lighter. See Cigar Lighter (page 137). Q Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 144). R Ignition switch. S Cruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 179). Adaptive cruise control (ACC) switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 182). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 187). T Steering wheel adjustment lever. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 49). U Driver knee airbag. See Principle of Operation (page 29). V Horn. W Cruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 179). Adaptive cruise control (ACC) switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 182). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 187). 12 At a Glance Electric child safety locks Unlocking the vehicle E78278 Pull a door handle to unlock all the doors and the luggage compartment lid and disarm the alarm. Locking the vehicle E124779 See Child Safety Locks (page 28). Keyless entry E87384 E78276 Passive locking and unlocking requires a valid passive key to be located within one of the three external detection ranges. E87435 See Keyless Entry (page 41). 13 At a Glance Adjusting the steering wheel Autowipers A WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. 2 C E70315 2 B A High sensitivity B On C Low sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor using the rotary control. 1 See Autowipers (page 51). E95178 Changing the wiper blades CAUTION You can use the service position in winter to provide easier access to the wiper blades for freeing them from snow and ice. The windscreen wipers will return to their normal position as soon as you switch on the ignition so make sure that the outside of the windscreen is free from snow and ice before you switch on the ignition. 3 E95179 See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 49). E75184 14 At a Glance The system will automatically switch on main beam if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead the system will switch off main beam before it can distract other road users. Dipped beams will remain on. A E75188 See Automatic Main Beam Control (page 56). Switch off the ignition and move the wiper lever to position A within three seconds. Release the lever when the windscreen wipers have moved to the service position. Direction indicators See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 53). Autolamps E70727 Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash only three times. E70719 Electric windows The headlamps will come on and go off automatically depending on the ambient light. Note: To reduce wind noise or buffeting when just one window is open, open the opposite window slightly. See Lighting Control (page 55). See Power Windows (page 74). Automatic main beam control WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. A manual override may be necessary if the system fails to switch the main beam on or off. 15 At a Glance Electric folding mirrors The system displays a yellow indicator located in the exterior mirrors. E124736 See Blind Spot Monitor (page 79). Information displays E72623 See Electric exterior mirrors (page 76). Reverse mirror dipping Depending on the selected mirror position, the relevant exterior mirror will dip whenever you select reverse gear, giving you a view of the kerb. E70499 Use the arrow buttons to navigate through the menus and press OK to make a selection. When you first use this feature, the mirrors will dip to a preset position. You can programme the degree of dipping. See Information Displays (page 88). See Electric exterior mirrors (page 76). Manual climate control Blind spot information system (BLIS) Cooling the interior quickly WARNING Do not use the system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors, and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The system is not a replacement for careful driving and is only to be used as an aid. E71381 16 At a Glance Heating the interior quickly Defrosting and demisting the windscreen E71377 E71382 Recommended settings for cooling See Manual Climate Control (page 112). Automatic climate control E131534 Open the centre and side air vents. E70304 Direct the centre air vents upwards and the side air vents toward the side windows. See Automatic Climate Control (page 114). Recommended settings for heating Engine idle speed after starting The engine may idle at a higher speed than normal immediately after starting from cold. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 144). E131535 Close the centre air vents and open the side air vents. Keyless starting Direct the side air vents toward the side windows. E85766 Press the start button. 17 At a Glance Fuel filler flap Stopping the engine when the vehicle is moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not be locked, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators may also be OFF. E86613 Press and hold the start button for two seconds, or press three times within three seconds. Press the flap to open it. Open the flap fully until it engages. See Keyless Starting (page 144). Diesel particulate filter (DPF) A WARNING Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The DPF regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after DPF regeneration, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. E139202 Insert the fuel nozzle up to and including the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel pipe opening. See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 149). WARNING We recommend that you remove the fuel nozzle slowly to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle. 18 At a Glance E119081 Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it. S See Fuel filler flap (page 155). Manual transmission E80836 Selecting reverse gear P Park R Reverse N Neutral D Drive S Manual shifting and sport mode See Automatic Transmission (page 162). Electric parking brake (EPB) E99067 Releasing the EPB manually On some vehicles it is necessary to raise the collar whilst selecting reverse gear. Note: To release the EPB, the ignition must be in position II. See Manual Transmission (page 162). Automatic transmission Note: Do not press the brake pedal when removing the key from the ignition switch. Selector lever positions WARNING E70529 Apply the brakes before moving the selector lever and keep them applied until you are ready to move off. Hold the brake pedal depressed and press down the switch. 19 At a Glance Automatic release - Drive away release (DAR) Galaxy Note: On vehicles with automatic transmission, the driver's door must be closed and the driver's seatbelt must be fastened before the DAR will operate. Engage first or reverse gear, move off as normal, the EPB will be released automatically. See Electric Parking Brake (page 166). Rear view camera WARNING E124349 The camera does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. See Rear view camera (page 176). Speed limiter The camera is a visual aid for use when reversing. The system allows you to set a speed, to which the vehicle then becomes limited. S-MAX See Speed Limiter (page 187). Driver alert WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. The system calculates an alertness score which can be displayed on the information display. If the system detects that you are becoming drowsy or there is deterioration in your driving style then warnings will be issued. E99105 See Driver Alert (page 189). 20 At a Glance Lane departure warning WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Activate the system using the switches on the indicator stalk. A B E131360 A System on B System off See Lane Departure Warning (page 191). Towing the vehicle on four wheels CAUTION For certain engine and transmission combinations, it is recommended not to tow the vehicle with the drive wheels on the ground. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 230). 21 Child Safety CHILD SEATS WARNINGS Do not leave unattended children in your vehicle. If your vehicle has been involved in an accident, have the child restraints checked by properly trained technicians. Note: Mandatory use of child restraints varies from country to country. E133140 Only child restraints certified to ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested and approved for use in your vehicle. A choice of these are available from your Dealer. Child restraints for different mass groups Use the correct child restraint as follows: Baby safety seat E68916 WARNINGS Secure children that are less than 150 centimetres (59 inches) tall in a suitable, approved child restraint, in the rear seat. Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions when you are fitting a child restraint. E68918 Secure children that weigh less than 13 kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facing baby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rear seat. Do not modify child restraints in any way. Do not hold a child on your lap when the vehicle is moving. 22 Child Safety Child safety seat CAUTION When using a child seat on a rear seat, make sure that the child seat rests tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 128). Booster seat (Group 2) E68920 Secure children that weigh between 13 and 18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a child safety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat. BOOSTER SEATS E70710 WARNINGS Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with only the lap strap of the seat belt. We recommend that you use a booster seat that combines a cushion with a backrest instead of a booster cushion only. The raised seating position will allow you to position the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt over the centre of your child’s shoulder and the lap strap tightly across its hips. Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with a seat belt that is slack or twisted. Do not put the seat belt under your child’s arm or behind its back. Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child’s height. Make sure that your children sit in an upright position. Secure children that weigh more than 15 kilograms (33 pounds) but are less than 150 centimetres (59 inches) tall in a booster seat or a booster cushion. 23 Child Safety Booster cushion (Group 3) WARNINGS If you want to use a group 1 child seat with a support leg, consult the child seat manufacturer's website or fitting instructions, to make sure compatibility with the vehicle and for details of any special fitting instructions regarding the removal of the stowage compartment cover. On certain vehicles it is not possible to open or remove the left-hand compartment cover. See Storage compartments (page 139). For group 0 or 0+ child seats, this does not prevent the support leg being located on the cover. However, if any larger child seat that you may wish to use requires you to remove the cover and extend the leg to the base of the compartment, either select a different seating position in the vehicle or a different child seat. E68924 CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNINGS Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child seats. When using a forward facing child seat on a second or third row seat, always remove the head restraint from that seat. See Head Restraints (page 128). When you are using a group 0 or 0+ child seat with a support leg on a second row seat, make sure that you locate the support leg securely on the under floor storage compartment cover. Make sure that you install the foam spacer correctly inside the storage compartment, using any screws or fastenings provided and, that you position the cover correctly. When using a child seat with a seat belt, make sure that the seat belt is not slack or twisted. Note: When using a child seat on a front seat, always adjust the front passenger seat to its fully rearwards position. If it proves difficult to tighten the lap section of the seat belt without slack remaining, adjust the seatback to the fully upright position and raise the height of the seat. See Manual Seats (page 125). See Power Seats (page 126). If the under floor storage compartment foam spacer is damaged or missing, remove the storage compartment cover and extend the leg to the base of the compartment. If it is not possible to locate the leg securely on the base of the compartment, for example because of the shape or length of the leg, replace the foam spacer and compartment cover or select a different seating position in the vehicle. Note: When using a child seat on a second row seat, adjust the second row seat to the most practical position for the driver. See Rear Seats (page 128). 24 Child Safety Child seat positions Mass group categories 0 Seating positions 0+ Up to 10 kg Up to 13 kg Baby safety seat 1 2 3 9 - 18 kg 15 - 25 kg 22 - 36 kg Child Booster seat or cushion safety seat Front passenger seat with airbag ON X X UF¹ UF¹ UF¹ Front passenger seat with airbag OFF U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹ Second row seats U U U U U Third row Galaxy U U U U U Third row S-MAX L, UF L, UF UF UF UF X Not suitable for children in this mass group. U Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group. U¹ Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child restraint, in the rear seat. L Suitable only for the following rearward facing child restraints: Roemer Baby-Safe (E1-04301146), Roemer Baby-Safe Plus (E1-04301146), Britax Cosy Tot (E1-04301146), Britax Cosy Tot Premium (E1-04301146), Maxi-Cosi Cabrio (E4-44R-043517). UF Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child restraint, in the rear seat. 25 Child Safety ISOFIX child seats Mass group categories 0+ 1 Rear facing Forward facing Up to 13 kg 9 - 18 kg Seating positions Front seat Size class Seat type Second row seats Third row rear seats Not ISOFIX equipped Size class C, D, E Seat type IL Size class Seat type * ** A, B, B1, C, D * *** IL, IUF Not ISOFIX equipped IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category. Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists. IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class. * The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraints systems is defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX child restraints. ** At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax Romer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child seats. *** At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer Duo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child seats. 26 Child Safety Attaching a child seat with top tethers ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS WARNING WARNING Use an anti-rotation device when using the ISOFIX system. We recommend the use of a top tether or support leg. Do not attach a tether strap to anything other than the correct tether anchor point. Note: Where applicable, remove the luggage cover to ease installation. See Luggage Covers (page 201). Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX restraint, make sure that you know the correct mass group and ISOFIX size class for the intended seating locations. See Child Seat Positioning (page 24). 1. Remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 128). Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchor points that accommodate universally approved ISOFIX child restraints. WARNING Make sure that the top tether strap is not slack or twisted and is properly located on the anchor point. The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid attachment arms on the child restraint that attach to anchor points on the outboard rear seats, where the cushion and backrest meet. Tether anchor points are fitted behind the outboard rear seats for child restraints with a top tether. 2. Route the tether strap to the anchor point. Top tether anchor points E75531 3. Push the child seat back firmly to engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points. 4. Tighten the tether strap in line with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. E75532 27 Child Safety CHILD SAFETY LOCKS WARNING You cannot open the doors from inside if you have put the child safety locks on. Manual child safety locks Note: On vehicles with keyless entry, use the spare key. See Keyless Entry (page 41). E124779 E78298 Left-hand side Turn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-hand side Turn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwise to unlock. Electric child safety locks Note: Pressing the switch will also disable the rear electric window switches. 28 Occupant protection Driver and front passenger airbags PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Airbags WARNINGS Do not modify the front of your vehicle in any way. This could adversely affect deployment of the airbags. Original text according to ECE R94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it! E74302 Wear a seat belt and keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Only when you use the seat belt properly, can it hold you in a position that allows the airbag to achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 125). The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbags will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus cushioning forward body movement. During minor frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the driver and front passenger airbags will not deploy. Have repairs to the steering wheel, steering column, seats, airbags and seat belts carried out by a properly trained technician. Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Driver knee airbag CAUTION Do not poke sharp objects into areas where airbags are fitted. This could damage and adversely affect deployment of the airbags. Do not attempt to open the driver knee airbag cover. The driver knee airbag will deploy during frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing a cushion between the driver’s knees and the steering column. During overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the knee airbag will not deploy. Use seat covers designed for seats with side airbags. Have these fitted by a properly trained technician. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp cloth. For item location: See At a Glance (page 10). 29 Occupant protection Note: The knee airbag has a lower deployment threshold than the front airbags. During a minor collision, it is possible that only the knee airbag deploys. Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trim panels over the front and rear side windows. Moulded badges in the B-pillar trim panels indicate that curtain airbags are fitted to your vehicle. Side airbags The curtain airbags will deploy during significant lateral collisions. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing protection for the head. During minor lateral collisions, front collisions, rear collisions, or overturns the curtain airbags will not deploy. Seat belts WARNINGS Wear a seat belt and keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Only when you use the seat belt properly, can it hold you in a position to achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 125). E72658 Side airbags are fitted inside the seatback of the front seats. A label indicates that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. The side airbags will deploy during significant lateral collisions. The airbags will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing protection for the chest and shoulder areas. During minor lateral collisions, overturns, front collisions and rear collisions, the side airbags will not deploy. Never use a seat belt for more than one person. Use the correct buckle for each seat belt. Do not use a seat belt that is slack or twisted. Curtain airbags Do not wear thick clothing. The seat belt must fit tightly around your body to achieve its optimum effect. Position the shoulder strap of the seat belt over the centre of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. E75004 30 Occupant protection The driver and front passenger seat belt retractors are fitted with a seat belt pretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners have a lower deployment threshold than the airbags. During minor collisions, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will deploy. Status after a collision WARNING Seat belts subjected to strain, as a result of an accident, should be renewed and the anchorages checked by a properly trained technician. FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS WARNING E74127 Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a distinct click. You have not fastened the seat belt properly if you do not hear a click. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope. Press the red button on the buckle to release the belt. Let it retract completely and smoothly. Note: The seat belt tongues are designed so that you can only insert them into the correct buckle. Second row centre seat belt 1 2 E74124 E74125 31 3 Occupant protection The retractor for the rear centre seat belt is located in the roof. SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT To fasten the seat belt: 1. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope. 2. Insert the smaller tongue into the black buckle to the right of the centre seat. 3. Pull the larger tongue across the lap and insert it into the buckle to the left of the centre seat. Note: If in constant use, you can leave the belt buckled in the black buckle. When it is not in use, or when you fold or move the rear seats, you should release the belt from the black buckle. E73135 To raise the height, grasp the D-ring and move the pivot up. To lower the height, grasp the D-ring, hold the locking button on the height adjuster pressed and move the pivot down. Note: Lifting the slider slightly while pressing the locking button makes it easier to release the locking mechanism. SEAT BELT REMINDER E74128 Press the red button on the left buckle to release the belt. Let it retract. WARNING Press the button on the side of the black buckle to release the belt. Let it retract completely and smoothly to the retractor in the roof. The occupant protection system will only provide optimum protection when you use the seat belt properly. The seat belt reminder warning lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver's or front seat passenger's seat belt has not been fastened and the vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. It will also illuminate if the driver's or front seat passenger's seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is moving. The audible warning and warning lamp will go off after seven minutes. 32 Occupant protection Deactivating the seat belt reminder See your dealer. USING SEAT BELTS DURING PREGNANCY E71313 Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation switch WARNING If you need to fit a child restraint on a seat protected by an operational airbag in front of it, have a passenger airbag deactivation switch fitted. Ask your dealer for further information. E68587 WARNING Position the seat belt correctly for your safety and that of your unborn child. Do not use only the lap strap or the shoulder strap. Note: The key switch is located in the glove compartment with an airbag deactivation lamp in the instrument panel. Position the lap strap comfortably across your hips and low beneath your pregnant abdomen. Position the shoulder strap between your breasts, above and to the side of your pregnant abdomen. If the airbag warning lamp illuminates or flashes when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). Remove the child restraint and have the system checked immediately. DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG Disabling the passenger airbag WARNING Make sure that the passenger airbag is disabled when using a rearward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat. A E71312 33 A Disabled B Enabled B Occupant protection Turn the switch to position A. When you switch the ignition on, check that the passenger airbag deactivation warning lamp illuminates. Enabling the passenger airbag WARNING Make sure that the passenger airbag is enabled when you are not using a child restraint on the front passenger seat. Turn the switch to position B. 34 Keys and Remote Controls Note: Further remote controls may be programmed at this stage. GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES 4. Press any button on each additional remote control within 10 seconds of each other. CAUTIONS The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems). If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Reprogramming the unlocking function Note: When you press the unlock button either all the doors are unlocked or only the driver’s door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock button again unlocks all the doors. Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons on the remote key simultaneously for at least four seconds with the ignition off. The direction indicators will flash twice to confirm the change. Check your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended. This will safeguard against any potential malicious frequency blocking. To return to the original unlocking function, repeat the process. Note: You could unlock the doors if you press the buttons on the remote control unintentionally. CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY The operating range between your remote control and your vehicle varies depending on the environment. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an E107998 environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority regarding recycling. PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL You can programme a maximum of eight remote controls to use with your vehicle (including any supplied with your vehicle). Remote control with a folding key blade Programming a new remote control 1. Insert the key in the ignition. 2. Cycle the key from position 0 to II and then back to 0 four times within six seconds. 3. Leave the key in position 0 and press any button on the remote control within 10 seconds. You will receive confirmation via a chime or LED that programming has been successful. 1 2 E128809 35 Keys and Remote Controls Remote control without a folding key blade 1. Insert a screwdriver in the position shown and gently push the clip. 2. Press the clip down to release the battery cover. 2 1 1 E87964 1. Press and hold the pushbuttons on the edges to release the cover. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Remove the key blade. E128810 3. Carefully remove the cover. 3 E128811 4. Turn the remote control over to remove the battery. 5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with the + facing upwards. 6. Replace the battery cover. E105362 3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in the position shown to separate the two halves of the remote control. 4 E119190 36 Keys and Remote Controls 4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in the position shown to open the remote control. 5 E125860 CAUTION Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 5. Carefully prise out the battery with the screwdriver. 6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with the + facing downwards. 7. Assemble the two halves of the remote control. 8. Install the key blade. 37 Locks Locking and unlocking confirmation LOCKING AND UNLOCKING CAUTION When you unlock the doors, the direction indicators will flash once. Check your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended. When you lock the doors, the direction indicators will flash twice. Central locking Locking and unlocking the doors with the key You can only centrally lock the doors if they are all closed. Note: The driver’s door can be unlocked with the key. This needs to be used if the remote control is not functioning. B B Note: Central locking also locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap. A Double locking A WARNING Do not activate double locking when persons or animals are inside the vehicle. You will not be able to unlock the doors from the inside if you have double locked them. E71962 A Unlock B Lock Double locking the doors with the key Turn the key to the lock position twice within three seconds to double lock the doors. E71961 Double locking is a theft protection feature that prevents someone from opening the doors from the inside. You can only double lock the doors if they are all closed. 38 Locks Locking and unlocking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control Locking and unlocking the doors from inside Driver's door A A B C E87379 B A Unlock B Lock C Luggage compartment lid unlock (press twice) E71958 Locking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control A Lock all doors B Unlock all doors Press button B once. Front and rear passenger doors Double locking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control Press button B twice within three seconds. E98653 To lock the front and rear passenger doors individually, press the button and close the door when leaving the vehicle. 39 Locks Luggage compartment lid Reprogramming the unlocking function Opening the luggage compartment lid The unlocking function may be reprogrammed so that only the driver’s door is unlocked. See Programming the remote control (page 35). GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING You can also operate the electric windows with the ignition off via the global opening and global closing function. E125429 Note: Global closing will only operate if you have set the memory correctly for each window. See Power Windows (page 74). Opening the luggage compartment lid with the remote control Global opening Press button C on the remote control twice within three seconds. Closing the luggage compartment lid E71960 A recessed grip is incorporated inside the luggage compartment lid to facilitate closing. E71955 Automatic relocking To open all the windows, press and hold the unlock button for at least three seconds. Press either the lock or the unlock button again to stop the opening function. The doors will relock automatically if you do not open a door within 45 seconds of unlocking the doors with the remote control. The door locks and the alarm will return to their previous state. 40 Locks Global closing WARNING Take care when using global closing. In an emergency, press the button on the driver’s door handle to stop. Vehicles without keyless entry WARNING Take care when using global closing. In an emergency, press a button immediately to stop. Note: Global closing can be activated using the button on the driver’s door handle. Global opening and closing can also be activated using the buttons on the passive key. To close all the windows, press and hold the button on the driver’s door handle for at least two seconds. The anti-trap function is also active during global closing. KEYLESS ENTRY General information WARNING The keyless entry system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as mobile phones. E71956 To close all the windows, press and hold the lock button for at least three seconds. Press any button again to stop the closing function. The anti-trap function is also active during global closing. Note: If the door handles are pulled repeatedly during a short period of time without the presence of a valid passive key, the system will become inoperable for 30 seconds. Vehicles with keyless entry The passive entry system will not function if: • The passive key frequencies are jammed. • The passive key battery is flat. Note: If the passive entry system does not function, you will need to use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. The keyless system allows the driver to operate the vehicle without the use of a key or remote control. E87384 41 Locks E78276 Passive locking and unlocking requires a valid passive key to be located within one of the three external detection ranges. These are located approximately one and a half metres from the driver and front passenger door handles and the luggage compartment lid. E87384 Passive key The vehicle can be locked and unlocked with the passive key. The passive key can also be used as a remote control. See Locking and Unlocking (page 38). Locking the vehicle E87435 Locking buttons are located on each of the front doors and the luggage compartment lid. WARNING The vehicle does not lock itself automatically. If no locking button is pressed, the vehicle will remain unlocked. To activate central locking and arm the alarm: • Press a locking button once. Note: The ignition will automatically switch off when you lock your vehicle from the outside. This is to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To activate double locking, to arm the alarm and the interior sensors: • Press a locking button twice within three seconds. Note: If locking from the luggage compartment lid, the passive key must be within the luggage compartment lid detection range. Note: Once activated, the vehicle will remain locked for approximately three seconds. This is to allow you to pull a door handle and check if the vehicle is locked. When the delay period is over, the doors can be opened again, provided the passive key is within the respective detection range. 42 Locks Luggage compartment lid Unlocking only the driver's door Note: The luggage compartment lid cannot be closed and will pop back up if the passive key is located inside the luggage compartment. If the unlocking function is reprogrammed so that only the driver’s door is unlocked ( See Keys and Remote Controls (page 35). ), note the following: Note: If a second valid passive key is located within the luggage compartment lid detection range, the luggage compartment lid can be closed. If the driver’s door is the first door which is opened, the other doors and the luggage compartment lid will remain locked. Doors can be unlocked individually by pulling the interior door handles on those doors. Unlocking the vehicle If the front passenger door or one of the rear doors is the first door which is opened, all the doors and the luggage compartment lid will be unlocked. Note: If the vehicle remains locked for longer than five days, the system will enter an energy-saving mode. This is to reduce the discharge of the vehicle battery. When the vehicle is unlocked while in this mode, the reaction time of the system may be a little longer than normal. Unlocking the vehicle once will deactivate the energy-saving mode. Disabled keys Any keys left inside the vehicle interior when it is locked will be disabled. A disabled key cannot be used to turn the ignition on or start the engine. In order to use these passive keys again, they have to be enabled. To enable all your passive keys, unlock the vehicle using a passive key or the remote control unlocking function. All passive keys will then be enabled if the ignition is turned on or the vehicle is started using a valid key. Locking and unlocking the doors with the key blade E78278 Pull one of the door handles or the luggage compartment lid handle. Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door. 2 One long flash of the direction indicators confirms that all the doors, the luggage compartment lid and the fuel filler flap have been unlocked and that the alarm has been disarmed. 1 E87964 43 1 Locks 1. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Remove the key blade and insert it into the lock. 44 Engine immobiliser If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, this indicates a malfunction. The message Immobiliser active will appear in the information display when you switch on the ignition. Have the immobiliser checked immediately. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The engine immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents someone from starting the engine with an incorrectly coded key. CODED KEYS Note: Do not shield your keys with metal objects. This may prevent the receiver from recognising your key as a valid one. Note: Have all of your remaining keys erased and recoded if you lose a key. Ask your dealer for further information. Have replacement keys recoded together with your existing keys. If you lose a key, you can obtain a replacement from your Ford Dealer. If possible, provide them with the key number from the tag provided with the original keys. You can also obtain additional keys from your Ford Dealer. ARMING THE ENGINE IMMOBILISER The engine immobiliser is armed automatically a short time after you have switched the ignition off. DISARMING THE ENGINE IMMOBILISER The engine immobiliser is disarmed automatically when you switch the ignition on with a correctly coded key. If the message Immobiliser active appears in the information display, your key has not been recognised. Remove the key and try again. 45 Alarm PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following alarm systems: The sensors must not be covered up. Do not activate the alarm with full guard if any persons, animals or other moving objects are inside the vehicle. • • • The sensors act as a deterrent against unauthorised intrusion by sensing any movement within the vehicle. Alarm system • Perimeter alarm. Perimeter alarm with interior sensors. Category one alarm with interior sensors and battery back-up sounder. Category one alarm with interior sensors, battery back-up sounder and tilt sensors. Battery back-up sounder The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorised access to your vehicle through the doors and the bonnet. It also protects the audio unit. The battery back-up sounder is an extra alarm system which will sound a siren when the alarm is triggered. It is armed directly when you lock the vehicle. The sounder has its own battery and will sound an alarm siren even if someone disconnects the vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself. Interior sensors Tilt sensors Vehicles without overhead console The tilt sensors detect if someone attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle away by sensing changes in the inclination of the vehicle. Perimeter alarm E71401 Note: When travelling on a ferry with the alarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensors by selecting reduced guard. This will prevent the alarm from being triggered by the movement. Vehicles with overhead console Triggering the alarm Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any of the following ways: • • • E131656 • 46 If someone opens a door, the tailgate or the bonnet without a valid key or remote control. If someone removes the audio or navigation system. If the ignition is turned to position I, II or III without a valid key. If the interior sensors detect movement within the vehicle. Alarm • • On vehicles with a battery back-up sounder, if someone disconnects the vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself. If the tilt sensors detect a change in the inclination of the vehicle. If you select Ask on Exit, the message Reduced guard? appears in the instrument cluster display each time you switch the ignition off. If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the OK button when this message appears. If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will sound for 30 seconds and the hazard warning flasher will flash for five minutes. If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave the vehicle without pressing the OK button. Any further attempts to perform one of the above will trigger the alarm again. Selecting full or reduced guard Full and reduced guard Note: Selecting Reduced does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It sets it to reduced guard only for the current ignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarm to reduced guard, select Ask on Exit. Full guard Full guard is the standard setting. In full guard, the interior and tilt sensors are activated when you arm the alarm. Note: This may result in false alarms if animals or moving objects are inside the vehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors, when travelling on a ferry. Note: False alarms can also be triggered by the auxiliary heater. See Auxiliary Heater (page 119). If you are using the auxiliary heater, direct the air flow towards the footwell. E70499 Reduced guard In reduced guard, the interior and tilt sensors are deactivated when you arm the alarm. Alarm Full Guard Reduced Ask on Exit Note: You can set the alarm to reduced guard for the current ignition cycle only. The next time you switch on the ignition, the alarm will be reset to full guard. Ask on Exit You can set the information display to ask you each time which level of guard you wish to set. E74509 47 Alarm 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Vehicles with keyless entry Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Alarm and press the right arrow button. Highlight Reduced or Full guard. If you prefer to be asked each time you switch off the ignition, select Ask on Exit. Press the OK button to confirm the selection. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. To return to the trip computer display directly, hold the left arrow button pressed. Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door for keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 41). Perimeter alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching the ignition on, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control. Category one alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching the ignition on within 12 seconds, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control. Information messages See Information Messages (page 101). ARMING THE ALARM To arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. See Locks (page 38). DISARMING THE ALARM Vehicles without keyless entry Perimeter alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control. Category one alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key within 12 seconds, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control. 48 Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Make sure that you fully engage the locking lever when returning it to its original position. WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. AUDIO CONTROL Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 125). A E 2 B D 2 C E72288 1 E95178 A Volume up B Seek up C Volume down D Seek down E Mode Mode Press and hold the mode button to select the audio source. Press the mode button to: • tune the radio to the next preset station • play the next CD • play the other side of a cassette tape • accept an incoming telephone call. • end a telephone call. 3 E95179 49 Steering Wheel Seek Press a seek button to: • tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band • play the next or the previous CD track • fast forward or rewind the cassette tape. Press and hold a seek button to: • tune the radio up or down the frequency band • seek through a CD track. 50 Wipers and Washers WINDSCREEN WIPERS CAUTIONS Replace the wiper blades as soon as they begin to leave bands of water and smears. If you do not replace them, the rain sensor will continue to detect water on the windscreen and the wipers will operate, even though the majority of the windscreen is dry. D C B Fully defrost the windscreen in icy conditions before you switch autowipers on. Switch autowipers off before you enter a car wash. A E70696 A Single wipe B Intermittent wipe C Normal wipe D High speed wipe A B Intermittent wipe A A Short wipe interval B Intermittent wipe C Long wipe interval A High sensitivity B On C Low sensitivity If you switch autowipers on, the wipers will not cycle until water is detected on the windscreen. The rain sensor will then continuously measure the amount of water on the windscreen and adjust the speed of the wipers automatically. C E70315 C E70315 B Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor using the rotary control. With low sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a lot of water on the windscreen. With high sensitivity, the wipers will operate if the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windscreen. AUTOWIPERS CAUTIONS Do not switch autowipers on in dry weather conditions. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or flies hit the windscreen. 51 Wipers and Washers WINDSCREEN WASHERS REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS WARNING Intermittent wipe Do not operate the windscreen washers for more than 10 seconds or when the reservoir is empty. Note: The washer jets are heated when the ignition is on. E70777 Reverse gear wipe The rear window wiper will operate automatically when you select reverse gear if the wiper lever is in position B, C or D. E70776 Washer ADJUSTING THE WINDSCREEN WASHER JETS WARNING Do not operate the rear window washer for more than 10 seconds or when the reservoir is empty. E73425 E70777 The eye ball jets can be adjusted precisely using a pin. Pull the lever fully towards the steering wheel and hold it to operate the washer. HEADLAMP WASHERS The headlamp washers will operate with the windscreen washers when the headlamps are on. 52 Wipers and Washers Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoir emptying quickly, the headlamp washers will not operate every time that you use the windscreen washers. Note: The windscreen wiper blades are different lengths. See Technical Specifications (page 54). If you install wiper blades of the wrong length, the rain sensor may not work correctly. CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES Set the windscreen wipers in the service position. E75184 E66644 A Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. E75188 Switch off the ignition and move the wiper lever to position A within three seconds. Release the lever when the windscreen wipers have moved to the service position. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Lift the wiper arms. 2 Windscreen wiper blades CAUTIONS Set the windscreen wipers in the service position to change the wiper blades. 1 E72899 You can use the service position in winter to provide easier access to the wiper blades for freeing them from snow and ice. Make sure that the outside of the windscreen is free from snow and ice before using the wipers. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. 53 Wipers and Washers Rear window wiper blades 2 5 1 4 E93783 E93785 6 3 E93786 Install in the reverse order. E93784 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Windscreen wiper blade lengths Dimension in mm (inches) Item Left-hand Right-hand Vehicles with autowipers 750 (29.5) 700 (27.6) Vehicles without autowipers 750 (29.5) 650 (25.6) 54 Lighting One side LIGHTING CONTROL A Lighting control positions A B C B E75505 A Right-hand side B Left-hand side Main and dipped beam E70718 A Off B Side and tail lamps C Headlamps E70725 Parking lamps Pull the lever fully towards the steering wheel to switch between main and dipped beam. CAUTION Prolonged use of the parking lamps will discharge the battery. Headlamp flasher Switch off the ignition. Pull the lever slightly towards the steering wheel. Both sides Home safe lighting Set the lighting control to position B. Switch the ignition off and pull the direction indicator lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlamps on. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will go off automatically after three minutes with any door open, or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. 55 Lighting With all doors closed, but within the 30 second delay, opening any door will result in the three minute timer starting again. WARNINGS Do not use the system in fog. The home safe lights can be cancelled by either pulling the direction indicator lever towards the steering wheel again or by turning the ignition switch on. CAUTIONS In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. A manual override may be necessary in these cases. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS Reflective road signs may be detected as oncoming traffic and the headlamps may be switched to dipped beam. The lamps will illuminate when the ignition is on. AUTOLAMPS If the lights of oncoming vehicles are hidden by obstacles (for example guard rails) the system may not deactivate the main beam. Always fit Ford Original Parts when replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may reduce system performance. Check and replace wiper blades regularly to ensure the camera sensor has a clear view through the windscreen. Replacement wiper blades must be the correct length. E70719 Note: If you have switched autolamps on, you can only switch the main beam on when autolamps has switched the headlamps on. The headlamps will come on and go off automatically depending on the ambient light. Note: Keep the windscreen free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice. The system will automatically switch on main beam if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead the system will switch off main beam before it can distract other road users. Dipped beams will remain on. AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM CONTROL WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. A manual override may be necessary if the system fails to switch the main beam on or off. A camera sensor is centrally mounted behind the windscreen of the vehicle, and monitors conditions continuously to decide when to switch the main beam off and on. A manual override may be required when approaching other road users such as cyclists. 56 Lighting Setting the system sensitivity Once the system is active the main beam will switch on if: • It is dark enough to require the use of main beams and • there is no traffic or street lighting ahead and • vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 mph). The system has three sensitivity levels which can be accessed via the information display. See Information Displays (page 88). The sensitivity determines the speed at which the main beam will be restored after detected traffic leaves the field of view. The main beam will switch off if: • The ambient light is high enough that main beam is not required. • An approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps are detected. • Street lighting is detected. • Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16 mph). • The camera sensor is too hot or becomes blocked. Manually overriding the system E70725 Use the main beam lever to switch between main beam and dipped beam. Activating the system Note: This is a temporary override and the system will return to automatic operation after a short period. Switch on the system using the information display and autolamps. See Information Displays (page 88). See Autolamps (page 56). To permanently deactivate the system use the information display menu or turn the lighting control switch from autolamps to headlamps. FRONT FOG LAMPS E70719 Turn the switch to the autolamps position. Note: The system may take a short time to initialise after first switching the ignition on, especially in very dark conditions. The main beam will not automatically switch on during this period. E70721 WARNING Only use the front fog lamps when visibility is considerably restricted by fog, snow or rain. 57 Lighting HEADLAMP LEVELLING REAR FOG LAMPS Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps are equipped with automatic headlamp levelling. E70720 WARNINGS Only use the rear fog lamps when visibility is restricted to less than 50 metres (164 feet). A Do not use the rear fog lamps when it is raining or snowing and visibility is more than 50 metres (164 feet). B E70722 ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS - VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING/XENON HEADLAMPS A Raised headlamp beams B Lowered headlamp beams You can adjust the level of the headlamp beams according to the vehicle load. To adjust the headlamps for driving on the left or right hand side of the road, see your dealer. Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions Load Second row seats Third row seats Load in luggage compartment Switch position Front seats 1-2 - - - 0 1-2 - 2 - 0 (0.5) 1-2 3 - - 1 (0.5) 58 ** ** Lighting Load * Front seats Second row seats Third row seats Load in luggage compartment 1-2 3 - Max 1 - - Max Switch position * 3 (0.5) * 4 (1.5) See Vehicle Identification Plate (page 264). ** Vehicles with active suspension. ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS A A B B E72897 A without AFS B with AFS 59 ** ** Lighting The AFS adjusts the headlamp dipped beam depending on vehicle direction and speed. It improves visibility when you are driving at night and helps to reduce headlamp glare for oncoming drivers. A message will appear in the information display if the system malfunctions. See Information Messages (page 101). The headlamps will move to a fixed central or dipped position. Have the system checked as soon as possible. The system will not operate when the vehicle is stationary, when you have switched on the daytime running lamps or when you have selected reverse gear. Cornering lamps A A B B E72898 A Headlamp beam B Cornering lamp beam For item location: See At a Glance (page 10). The cornering lamps illuminate the inside of a corner when you are turning. HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS E71943 60 Lighting If you set the switch to position B, the courtesy lamp will come on when you unlock or open a door or the luggage compartment lid. If you leave a door open with the ignition switch off, the courtesy lamp will go off automatically after some time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch it back on, switch on the ignition for a short time. DIRECTION INDICATORS The courtesy lamp will also come on when you switch off the ignition. It will go off automatically after a short time or when you start or restart the engine. E70727 If you set the switch to position C with the ignition switch off, the courtesy lamp will come on. It will go off automatically after a short time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch it back on, switch on the ignition for a short time. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash only three times. INTERIOR LAMPS Courtesy lamp Reading lamps A B C E71946 A Off B Door contact If you switch off the ignition, the reading lamps will go off automatically after some time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch on the ignition for a short time. C On LED Interior lighting E71945 Note: Individual lamps may be switched on independently, but not off if all lamps have been switched on by the driver. Note: All other lamps will be either non-switchable or with individual reading or dome lamp functionality only. 61 Lighting The lamps will come on when you unlock or open a door or the luggage compartment lid. If you leave a door open with the ignition switch off, all lamps will go off automatically after some time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch on the ignition for a short time. Centre mounted lamp B A Side mounted lamp A E139420 E139419 C B A Reading lamp on and off switch B Door function switch C All lamps on and off switch D C A Right-hand side reading lamp on and off switch B Left-hand side reading lamp on and off switch C Door function switch D All lamps on and off switch If you press switch C all lamps remain off when the door is opened. Press the switch again to reverse. You can control all lamps using switch D. If you press switch B all lamps remain off when the door is opened. Press the switch again to reverse. You can control all lamps using switch C. 62 Lighting Vanity mirror lamps A B E72900 E72257 A Off B On Note: When you remove the headlamp, make sure that the front screw remains in the headlamp moulding. If you switch off the ignition, the vanity mirror lamps will go off automatically after a short time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch on the ignition for a short time. 2. Remove the screws. REMOVING A HEADLAMP WARNING Have Xenon bulbs changed by a properly trained technician. There is a risk of electric shock. 1. Open the bonnet. See Opening and Closing the Bonnet (page 232). E88875 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Pull the headlamp as far as possible towards the centre of the vehicle and disengage it from the lower fixing point. 5. Lift the outer side of the headlamp and remove it. Note: When fitting the headlamp, make sure that you reconnect the electrical connector properly. 63 Lighting Note: When fitting the headlamp, make sure that you fully engage the headlamp in the lower fixing point. A B C D Note: When fitting the headlamp, make sure that the front screw is located in the headlamp moulding before you install it. Note: When fitting the headlamp, tighten the front screw first and then the rear screw. CHANGING A BULB E72258 WARNINGS Switch the lights and the ignition off. Let the bulb cool down before removing it. Have Xenon bulbs changed by a properly trained technician. There is a risk of electric shock. A Direction indicator B Headlamp main beam C Headlamp dipped beam D Cornering lamp Direction indicator 1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 63). CAUTIONS Do not touch the glass of the bulb. Only fit bulbs of the correct specification. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 72). 2 Note: The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Fit replacements in the reverse order unless otherwise stated. 3 Headlamp Note: Remove the covers to gain access to the bulbs. E72259 2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 3. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. 64 Lighting Headlamp main beam 1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 63). 3 2 2 E72262 3 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Release the clip and remove the bulb. E72261 Daytime running lamps 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Release the clip and remove the bulb. Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail. Headlamp dipped beam 1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 63). 3 2 E126170 E72260 2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the bulb. Cornering lamp 1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 63). 65 Lighting Side repeater 1 E72264 1. E72263 1. Carefully remove the side repeater. Insert a screwdriver into the gap between the mirror housing and the mirror glass and release the metal retaining clip. 3 E72291 2. Remove the bulb holder. 3. Remove the bulb. 2 Approach lamp E72265 Note: Position the mirror glass as far inwards as possible. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Remove the bulb. Front fog lamp and side lamp (SMAX) 1. 66 Remove the headlamp to access the fog lamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 63). Lighting Front fog lamp and side lamp (Galaxy) 6 5 4 4 3 2 2 E126440 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp bulb from the bulb holder. 3 3. Turn the fog lamp bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Turn the side lamp bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 6. Remove the side lamp bulb. 1 E126538 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector. Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp bulb from the bulb holder. 4. Turn the fog lamp bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 5 6 E72269 5. Turn the side lamp bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 6. Remove the side lamp bulb. 67 Lighting Rear lamps (S-MAX) Direction indicator, tail and brake lamp Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail. E74076 2. Remove the wing nuts. 3. Remove the lamp. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. E126274 Reversing lamp, tail lamp and fog lamp E126303 5. Remove the screws. 6. Remove the bulb holder. 7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. E72271 1. Remove the trim panel. 68 Lighting Rear lamp (Galaxy) Direction indicator, tail and brake lamp E72792 3. Remove the lamp. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. E75380 1. Remove the trim panel. E72793 Note: On some vehicles the tail lamps are LED. These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail. E72791 5. Remove the screw. 6. Remove the bulb holder. 7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. 2. Remove the wing nuts. 69 Lighting 6. Remove the bulb holder. 7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. Reversing lamp, tail lamp and fog lamp Central high mounted brake lamp Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail. Number plate lamp 2 E72794 1. Remove the trim panel. 3 1 E72789 1. Carefully release the spring clip. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Turn the bulb anti-clockwise and remove it. Interior lamps E72795 Vehicles with LED lamps 2. Remove the wing nuts. 3. Remove the lamp. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail. E126393 5. Remove the screw. 70 Lighting Reading lamps Vehicles without interior sensors Vehicles without interior sensors 3 3 3 2 2 E72788 1. Carefully prise out the lens. 2. Remove the lens. 3. Remove the bulb. E72796 1. Carefully prise out the lens. 2. Remove the lens. 3. Remove the bulb. Vehicles with interior sensors Vehicles with interior sensors 3 1 2 2 2 E72787 E72786 1. Carefully prise out the lens. 2. Remove the lens. 3. Remove the bulb. 1. Carefully prise out the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. 71 Lighting 1. Carefully prise out the lamp. 2. Remove the bulb. Luggage compartment lamp and tailgate lamp 3 E73939 3. Remove the bulb. Vanity mirror lamp E72784 1. Carefully prise out the lamp. 2. Remove the bulb. E72785 BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Lamp Specification Power (watt) Front direction indicator PY21W 21 Headlamp main beam H1 55 Headlamp dipped beam H7 55 Cornering lamp H1 55 Side repeater W5W 5 Approach lamp W5W 5 Front fog lamp (S-MAX) H8 35 Front fog lamp (Galaxy) HB4 55 72 Lighting Lamp Specification Power (watt) Side lamp W5W 5 Rear direction indicator PY21W 21 Rear fog lamp P21W 21 Reversing lamp P21W 21 Number plate lamp W5W 5 Interior lamp Festoon 10 Reading lamp BA9s 5 Vanity mirror lamp W5W 5 Luggage compartment lamp W6W 6 73 Windows and Mirrors Driver’s door switches POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not operate the electric windows unless they are free from obstruction. Note: If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain time to prevent damage due to overheating. E121510 You can operate all the windows with the switches on the door trim panel of the driver’s door. Note: You can operate the windows for several minutes after you switch off the ignition. They will be deactivated as soon as a door is opened. Front and rear passengers’ door switches Note: If you operate both the switch on the relevant door and the switch for that window on the driver’s door at the same time, the window will stop moving. Switch on the ignition to operate the electric windows. Global opening and global closing You can also operate the electric windows with the ignition off via the global opening and global closing function. See Global Opening and Closing (page 40). E70849 Note: Global opening and global closing will open or close the windows automatically only on vehicles equipped with four electric windows. Opening and closing the windows automatically Note: Global closing will only operate if you have set the memory correctly for each window. Press or lift the switch to the second action point and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the windows. Safety switch for rear windows WARNING On some vehicles, pressing the switch will also lock the rear doors from inside. See Child Safety Locks (page 28). Note: You can always operate the rear windows from the driver’s door. 74 Windows and Mirrors 2. Close the window a third time to the resistance. The anti-trap function is disabled and you cannot close the window automatically. The window will override the resistance and you can close it fully. 3. If the window does not close after the third attempt, have it checked by a properly trained technician. Resetting the memory of the electric windows E121511 A switch in the driver’s door disables the rear electric window switches. WARNING The anti-trap function is deactivated until you have reset the memory. The light in the switch illuminates and the lights in the rear window switches go off when the rear windows are disabled. After the battery has been disconnected from the vehicle you must reset the memory separately for each window: Anti-trap function WARNING 1. Lift the switch until the window is fully closed. Hold the switch lifted for one more second. 2. Release the switch and lift it again, two or three times, for one more second. 3. Open the window and try to close it automatically. 4. Reset and repeat procedure if the window does not close automatically. Careless closing of the windows can override the protection function and cause injuries. The electric windows will stop automatically while closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Overriding the anti-trap function Safety mode CAUTION WARNING While you close the window for the third time, the anti-trap function is disabled. Make sure there are no obstacles in the way of the closing window. The anti-trap function is not active during this procedure. If the system detects a malfunction, it enters a safety mode. The windows will move for only about 0.5 seconds at a time and then stop again. Close the windows by pressing the switch again when the windows stop moving. Have this checked immediately. To override this protection function when there is a resistance, for example, in the winter, proceed as follows: 1. Close the window twice until it reaches the resistance and let it reverse. 75 Windows and Mirrors Mirror tilting positions EXTERIOR MIRRORS WARNING Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the convex mirror. Objects seen in convex mirrors will appear smaller and further away than they actually are. E70847 Manual folding mirrors Push the mirror towards the door window glass. The electric exterior mirrors are fitted with a heating element that will defrost or demist the mirror glass. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 119). Unfolding Electric folding mirrors Folding Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. Automatic folding and unfolding ELECTRIC EXTERIOR MIRRORS The mirrors will fold automatically when you lock the vehicle with the key, the remote control or a keyless entry system request. The mirrors will unfold when you unlock the vehicle with the key, the remote control, a keyless entry system request, the driver's interior door handle or starting the engine. A Note: If the mirrors have been folded using the manual fold button they can only be unfolded using the manual fold button. Manual folding and unfolding C The electric folding mirrors operate with the ignition on. B E70846 A Left-hand mirror B Off C Right-hand mirror Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirror tilting and folding) for several minutes after you switch off the ignition. They will be deactivated as soon as a door is opened. 76 Windows and Mirrors When you first use this feature, the mirror will dip to a preset position. This position can be adjusted using the following sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E72623 Turn the ignition on. Do not start the engine. Select the desired exterior mirror (A or C). Select reverse gear, the selected exterior mirror will adjust to a preset position. Adjust the mirror to the required dipped position. Disengage reverse gear or press and hold the desired memory pre-set button until a single chime sounds to confirm. See Memory Function (page 141). Press the button to fold or unfold the mirrors. The settings will be stored automatically. If you press the switch again while the mirrors are moving, they will stop and reverse the direction of movement. AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR Note: When the mirrors are operated often during a short period of time, the system may become inoperable for a period of time to prevent damage due to overheating. Reverse mirror dipping Depending on the switch position (A or C), the relevant exterior mirror will dip whenever you select reverse gear, giving you a view of the kerb. E71028 The auto-dimming mirror will adjust automatically when hit by glaring light from behind. It will not work when you have selected reverse gear. Note: You can disable this feature by leaving the switch in position B. The exterior mirror will return to the original position: • If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). • Approximately 10 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged. • If the switch is returned to position B. 77 Windows and Mirrors Closing REAR QUARTER WINDOWS Manual rear quarter windows Opening 1 1 E95384 E72126 2 2 E95385 Note: Make sure that the lever is securely engaged in its catch. Electric rear quarter windows E95383 Switch on the ignition to operate the rear quarter windows. 78 Windows and Mirrors A A E124788 E72127 Using the system BLIND SPOT MONITOR The system displays a yellow indicator located in the exterior mirrors. Blind spot information system (BLIS) WARNINGS The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects. The system only provides a warning to assist you in detecting vehicles in the blind spot zones. The system will not detect obstacles, pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists. E124736 Note: Both indicators will illuminate briefly when you switch the ignition on to confirm that the system is operational. Do not use the system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors, and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The system is not a replacement for careful driving and is only to be used as an aid. Note: On vehicles with automatic transmission, the system is active only in S, D and N. The system is only active when you exceed 10 km/h (6 mph). The system is temporarily deactivated when you select reverse gear. The system is a convenience feature that aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearwards from the exterior mirrors to approximately 3 metres (10 feet) beyond the bumper. The system will alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone whilst driving. System detection and alerts The system will trigger the alert for vehicles that enter the blind spot zone from the rear or merge from the side. Vehicles that you pass, or vehicles that enter the blind spot zone from the front, will only trigger the alert after the vehicle has remained in the blind spot zone for a short period of time. 79 Windows and Mirrors Note: Vehicles that pass through the blind zone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds) will not trigger the alert. False alerts Note: False alerts are temporary and will self correct. The system consists of two radar sensors each located behind the rear wheels hidden behind the bumpers. There may be certain instances when the system will alert with no vehicle present in the blind zone. CAUTIONS Do not place items such as bumper stickers in this area. Circumstances where false alerts may occur: • Road guardrails. • Motorway concrete walls. • Construction areas. • Sharp turns around a building. • Bushes and trees. • Cyclists and motorcyclists. • Coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close. Repairs to these areas using body filler will affect the performance of the system. Turning the system on and off Note: The on or off position will remain until manually changed. You can turn the system on and off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 88). E124741 Detection limitations When you turn the system off no further alerts will be received. The BLIS warning indicator will illuminate. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). There may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zones may not be detected. Detection errors Instances which may cause non-detection: • Debris build up on the rear bumper panels in the area of the sensors. • Certain manoeuvring of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone. • Vehicles passing through the blind zone at high speed. • Severe weather conditions. • Several vehicles passing through the blind zone following each other closely. Note: The alert indicator in the mirror will not illuminate. If the system senses a fault on either sensor, the system warning symbol will illuminate and remain on. The information display will confirm the fault and indicate whether the left or right side is affected. 80 Windows and Mirrors Blocked sensor WARNING Prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and issuing a warning, the number of missed objects will increase. CAUTION The sensors may not detect vehicles in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections. Note: Keep the rear bumper area surrounding the sensors free from dirt, ice and snow. If a sensor becomes blocked the system performance may degrade. A blocked sensor message may be displayed. The system will automatically return to normal operation once two other vehicles have been detected on both sides. Trailer towing false alerts CAUTION Vehicles fitted with a trailer tow module not approved by us may not correctly be detected. Switch the system off to avoid false alerts. See Information Displays (page 88). If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer tow module approved by us, the system will detect a connected trailer and deactivate. A confirmation message will be shown in the information display. See Information Messages (page 101). The BLIS warning indicator will illuminate. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). 81 Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type 1 and 2 A B C E72984 A Tachometer B Engine coolant temperature gauge C Fuel gauge D Speedometer 82 D Instrument Cluster Type 3 A B D E C E130765 A Tachometer B Speedometer C Engine coolant temperature gauge D Fuel gauge E Message centre. See Information Displays (page 88). CAUTION Engine coolant temperature gauge Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved. Note: On type 3 this gauge is shown within the message centre and will not be displayed unless required. See Information Displays (page 88). If the indicator moves towards 120°C, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the indicator will remain in the centre section. 83 Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Airbag warning lamp Note: On type 3 this gauge is shown within the message centre. If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol tells you on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler cap is located. Blind spot monitor indicator WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS It will illuminate when this feature is switched off or in E124823 conjunction with a message. See Blind Spot Monitor (page 79). See Information Messages (page 101). The following warning lamps and indicators will illuminate briefly when you switch the ignition on to confirm that the system is operational: • ABS • Airbag • Blind spot monitor • Brake system • Coolant temperature • Electric parking brake (EPB) • Engine • Frost • Ignition • Oil pressure • Stability control (ESP) Brake system lamp It illuminates when the parking brake is engaged. WARNING Reduce your speed gradually and stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Use your brakes with care. If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. If a warning or indicator lamp does not illuminate when the ignition is switched on, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by properly trained technician. Coolant temperature warning lamp CAUTION Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. ABS warning lamp If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have normal braking (without ABS). Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. 84 Instrument Cluster Front fog lamp indicator If it stays on after starting or illuminates when driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the coolant level. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on. Frost warning lamp WARNING Direction indicators Even if the temperature rises to above 4ºC (39.2°F) there is no guarantee that the road is free of hazards caused by inclement weather. Flashes during operation. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing warns of a failed indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 64). It will illuminate and glow amber when the outside air temperature is between 4ºC (39.2ºF) and 0ºC (32ºF). It will glow red when the temperature is below 0ºC (32ºF). Engine warning lamp If it illuminates with the engine running, this indicates a malfunction. If it flashes when you are driving, reduce the speed of your vehicle immediately. If it continues to flash, avoid heavy acceleration or deceleration. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. Glow plug indicator See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 148). CAUTION Headlamp indicator If the engine warning lamp illuminates in conjunction with a message, have the system checked as soon as possible. It will illuminate when you switch the headlamp dipped beam or the side and tail lamps on. Ignition warning lamp Electric parking brake (EPB) warning lamp If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. It will illuminate when an EPB warning message is displayed in the information display. See Electric Parking Brake (page 166). Forward alert indicator E124824 It will illuminate when this feature is switched off. See Forward alert function (page 186). 85 Instrument Cluster Rear fog lamp indicator Lane departure warning indicator It will illuminate when this feature is switched off or in conjunction with a message. The indicator will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Lane Departure Warning (page 191). See Information Messages (page 101). It will illuminate when you switch the rear fog lamps on. Seat belt reminder Low fuel level warning lamp Shift indicator See Seat belt reminder (page 32). If it illuminates, refuel as soon as possible. It will illuminate to inform you that shifting to a higher gear may give better fuel economy and lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminate during periods of high acceleration, braking or when the clutch pedal is pressed. Main beam indicator It will illuminate when you switch the headlamp main beam on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher. Stability control (ESP) warning lamp While driving, it flashes during activation of the system. After switching on the ignition, if it does not illuminate or illuminates continuously while driving, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction, the system switches off. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Message indicator It will illuminate when a new message is stored in the information display. See Information Messages (page 101). Oil pressure warning lamp CAUTION If you switch ESP off, the warning lamp will illuminate. The lamp will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. Do not resume your journey if the oil pressure warning lamp illuminates despite the oil level being correct. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. Start-stop indicator It will illuminate to inform you when the engine shuts down or in conjunction with a message. See Using start-stop (page 151). See Information Messages (page 101). If the lamp stays on after starting or illuminates during a journey, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 243). 86 Instrument Cluster AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Switching the chimes on and off You can deactivate certain chimes. To set which chimes should sound: E70499 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Chimes and press the right arrow button. Highlight the chime and press the OK button to switch the chime on and off. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Press and hold the left arrow button to return to the main menu display. 87 Information Displays Press the up and down arrow buttons: GENERAL INFORMATION • WARNING • Do not operate the information display controls when the vehicle is moving. to scroll through the trip computer displays to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button: • Note: The information display will remain on for several minutes after you switch off the ignition. • to enter the main menu from the trip computer displays to enter a sub-menu. Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the buttons on your steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. For detailed instructions on audio, navigation, phone etc. refer to the appropriate manual. Note: The system will return to the trip computer displays automatically if you do not press any button for a period of time. Controls Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting. Hold the left arrow button pressed at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button). E70499 Instrument cluster functions Function Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Trip computer X X X Information messages X X X Clock setup X X X Display settings - X X Park heater setup - X X 88 Information Displays Function Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Navigation control - - X CD control - - X CD changer control - - X Radio control - - X Phone control - - X Auxiliary input control - - X Press the up and down arrow buttons on the steering wheel to scroll through the trip computer displays. See Trip Computer (page 97). Type 1 E80604 89 Information Displays Menu structure BLIS ECO MODE Gear Shifting Anticipation Speed For more Info Reset trip Trip Odo Avg Fuel Avg Speed All values Information Messages Auto StartStop Clock Set Clock 24 Hour Mode 12 Hour Mode E131626 Press the up and down arrow buttons on the steering wheel to scroll through the trip computer displays. See Trip Computer (page 97). Type 2 09:00 Average Fuel l 6.3 100km 123456 km 234.2 km E74426 90 Information Displays Menu structure ESP BLIS ECO MODE Gear shifting Anticipation Speed For more Info Trip Odo Avg fuel Avg speed All Messages Auto StartStop Tyre Press. Set Clock 24 Hour Mode 12 Hour Mode Display Configure Reset Trip Information Clock Setup Language Measure unit A B E131627 91 Help Screen Radio Info Phone Info NAV info Always off On guidance Always on English Deutsch Italiano Français Español Türkçe Pyccкий Nederlands Polski Svenska Português Metric Imperial Information Displays A B Chimes Low Fuel General info. General warn. Home light Forw Alert Low Normal High Off Hill Launch Off Auto Manual Tyre Pressure Check Low load High load Alarm Full guard Reduced Ask on exit Aux. Heater Time 1 Set Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Time 2 Set Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Parkheater E87753 Once Active now 92 Information Displays Type 3 CD CD changer Radio Phone E88048 Trip computer Use the controls to scroll through the menu displays. Settings Device list The highlighted icon shows the current menu in use. Auxiliary input Navigation 93 Information Displays Menu structure Navigation Home Destinat. mem. Destinat. A-Z Last destinat. Cancel guidan. Destinations Destinations Destinations CD Folder / Tracks CD changer CD 1 CD 2 CD 3 CD 4 CD 5 CD 6 Folder / Tracks Folder / Tracks Folder / Tracks Folder / Tracks Folder / Tracks Folder / Tracks Radio Station list FM 1 / FM FM 2 FM 3 FM - AST MW / AM LW / AM-AST Stations Stations Stations Stations Stations Stations Stations Phone Phone book Redial Incoming calls Outgoing calls Call status Numbers Trip computer Numbers Numbers Distance to empty Average fuel Average speed Reset selected element Reset trip odometer A E131628 94 Information Displays A Settings ESP BLIS ECOMODE Gear shifting Anticipation Speed More info Messages Driver alert Auto StartStop Tyre Pressure Coolant temperature Information Set Clock 24-hour mode 12-hour mode Driver alert Colour themes Display Configure Help Screen NAV info Always off On guidance Always on Language Clock Setup English Deutsch Italiano Français Español Türkçe Pyccкий Nederlands Polski Svenska Português A B Measure unit C Metric Imperial E131629 95 Information Displays C Chimes Low Fuel General info. General warn. Home light Forw Alert Low Normal High Off Lane depart Sensitivity Normal High Intensity High Normal Low Auto beam On Sensitivity Hill Launch Off Auto Manual Tyre Pressure Check Low load High load Alarm Full guard Reduced Ask on exit Aux Heater E131630 96 High Normal Low Information Displays A B Park heater Time 1 Set Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Time 2 Set Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Once Active now E88067 Auxiliary input Average fuel consumption TRIP COMPUTER Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset. Odometer Registers the total mileage of the vehicle. Average speed Tripmeter Indicates the average speed calculated since the function was last reset. Registers the mileage of individual journeys. Outside air temperature Shows the outside air temperature. Distance to empty Indicates the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary. 97 Information Displays Type 1 and 2 Resetting the trip computer using the main menu To reset a particular display: 10:20 1. 2. Average Fuel l 6.3 100km A 123456 km B 234.2 km C 3. 4. 5. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Reset Trip with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight the function to be reset. Press the right arrow button to select the function. Hold the OK button pressed. To reset all three displays, select All values and hold the OK button pressed. E74428 Type 3 A. Trip computer B. Odometer C. Tripmeter The trip computer includes the following information displays: Average fuel Average speed A E88049 Outside air A Reset Trip Trip computer Press the OK button on the steering wheel to cycle through the different trip computer displays. To reset a value, press and hold the OK button. Dist. to empty E74441 Resetting the trip computer using the main menu Press the up and down arrow buttons on the steering wheel to scroll through the trip computer displays. To reset a particular display: 1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. 2. Highlight the function to be reset. Note: The position of the trip computer display may vary depending on the information shown in the display. 98 Information Displays 3. Hold the OK button pressed. 2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. 3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. 4. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button. 5. To toggle the Help screen and NAV Info on and off, highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. PERSONALISED SETTINGS The following information is displayed in the information display if you have selected it: Help screen, radio, navigation and phone information The help screen appears for a few seconds when you switch the ignition on. Navigation information If the radio, navigation or telephone is operating, information relating to this system is displayed in the information display. You can also choose when the navigation information is displayed in the information display. Three options are available: • To select which information is displayed in the information display: • Type 1 and 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button. To toggle the Help screen, Radio Info and Phone Info on and off, highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. • To set when navigation information should be displayed: Type 1 and 2 1. 2. 3. Type 3 1. Always off: No navigation information is displayed in the information display. On guidance: The navigation information will only appear when the navigation system provides a guidance instruction. This function is only available on certain navigation systems. Always on: Navigation information will always appear in the information display when the navigation system is operating. 4. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. 5. 99 Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button. Highlight Nav Info and press the right arrow button. Information Displays 6. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. 7. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. 6. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. Type 3 1. Type 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button. Highlight Nav Info and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. 2. 3. 4. 5. Units of measure Note: The outside air temperature is only displayed in degrees Celsius and cannot be set to degrees Fahrenheit. Language To select metric or imperial units: A choice of eleven languages are available: Type 1 and 2 English, German, Italian, French, Spanish, Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedish and Portuguese. 1. 2. Type 1 and 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Language and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Language and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. 3. 4. 5. 6. 100 Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Measure Unit and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. Press the left arrow button to return to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. Information Displays Message symbols Type 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button. Highlight Measure Unit and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. See Owner’s handbook. Have the system checked at the next service. Have the system checked as soon as possible. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Viewing current messages INFORMATION MESSAGES Type 1 and 2 1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. 2. Highlight Information with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. 3. Highlight Messages and press the right arrow button. 4. Use the up and down buttons to view the current messages. E70499 Type 3 Press OK to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time. 1. 2. With instrument cluster type 3, certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus. 3. Message indicator 4. The message indicator illuminates to supplement some messages. It will be red or amber depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the cause of the message has been rectified. 5. 101 Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Information with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Messages and press the right arrow button. Use the up and down buttons to view the current messages. Information Displays Active suspension Message Indicator Action Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. IVDC malfunction amber IVDC comfort - See Active suspension (page 173). IVDC normal - See Active suspension (page 173). IVDC sport - See Active suspension (page 173). Airbag Message Indicator Airbag malfunction amber Action Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Alarm Message Indicator Alarm triggered amber Alarm system service reqd. - Action See Alarm (page 46). Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. Automatic main beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert Message Indicator Action Driver fatigue Rest now red Front camera Clean screen amber The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the windscreen. Front camera malfunction amber The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Have this checked as soon as possible. Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so. 102 Information Displays Message Indicator Action Front camera not available amber The affected systems are temporarily unavailable, and should resume after a few minutes. Driver fatigue Rest suggested amber Take a rest break soon. Lane departure warn. malfunct. amber The system has malfunctioned. Have this checked as soon as possible. Battery and charging system Message Indicator Action Overvoltage: Stop safely! red Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Low battery amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Blind spot monitor Message Indicator Action BLIS sensor blocked amber See Blind Spot Monitor (page 79). BLIS right sensor malfunction amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. BLIS left sensor malfunction amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. BLIS malfunction amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. BLIS inactive Trailer attach'd amber See Blind Spot Monitor (page 79). 103 Information Displays Child power lock Message Child lock malfunction Indicator amber Action Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Climate control Message Indicator Aux. Heater on amber Action See Auxiliary Heater (page 119). Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Message Indicator Action ACC malfunction amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Clean radar sensor amber See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 181). Forward Alert malfunction amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. ACC unavailable - See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 181). Cruise control active - See Cruise Control (page 179). Cruise control standby - See Cruise Control (page 179). Doors open Message Indicator Action Driver door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Driver side rear door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Passenger door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. 104 Information Displays Message Indicator Action Passenger side rear door open red Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Luggage comp. open red Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. Bonnet open red Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. See Opening and Closing the Bonnet (page 232). Engine immobiliser Message Indicator Immobiliser active amber Action See Engine immobiliser (page 45). Hill start assist Message Indicator Action Hill Launch not available amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. Please use park brake! amber See Hill Start Assist (page 170). Hill Launch Assist active - See Hill Start Assist (page 170). Hill Launch Assist off - See Hill Start Assist (page 170). Keyless system Message Indicator Action Steering malfunction red Key not detected amber See Keyless Entry (page 41). Car operative Press STOP amber The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off. See Keyless Starting (page 144). Have this checked as soon as possible. 105 Information Displays Message Indicator Action Key outside car amber See Keyless Entry (page 41). Key battery low amber See Changing the remote control battery (page 35). Steering locked Retry - See Steering Wheel Lock (page 146). Lighting Message Indicator Action Front lights malfunction amber Low beam: Bulb fault - One or both of the headlamp dipped beam bulbs have blown. Check the headlamp dipped beam bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 64). Rear fog light: Bulb fault - One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs have blown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 64). Stop lamps: Bulb fault - One or both of the brake lamp bulbs have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 64). Trailer stopl.: Bulb fault - One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on your trailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs on your trailer. Trailer turnl.: Bulb fault - One or both of the direction indicator bulbs on your trailer have blown. Check the direction indicator bulbs on your trailer. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. 106 Information Displays Maintenance Message Indicator Action Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Engine malfunction red Check engine oil level amber See Engine Oil Check (page 243). Water detected in fuel amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Low washer fluid level - See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). Service oil - Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. Occupant protection Message Indicator Action Crash mode - Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Message Indicator Action Park brake applied red See Parking Brake (page 165). Park brake applied amber See Parking Brake (page 165). Parking brake Electric parking brake (EPB) Message Indicator Action Park brake malfunction red Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Release park brake red See Electric Parking Brake (page 166). Re-Apply park brake red See Electric Parking Brake (page 166). 107 Information Displays Message Indicator Action Park brake applied amber See Electric Parking Brake (page 166). Park brake released amber See Electric Parking Brake (page 166). Park brake service reqd. - Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. Power steering Message Indicator Action Power steering malfunction amber Full steering will be maintained but you will need to exert greater force on the steering wheel. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Stability control (ESP) Message Indicator Action ESP malfunction - Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. ESP off - See Using Stability Control (page 169). Start-stop Message Message indicator Action Auto StartStop Switch ign off red Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicle if the system has shut down the engine. See Using start-stop (page 151). Auto StartStop Press clutch - The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutch pedal to start. See Using start-stop (page 151). Auto StartStop Select neutral - Select neutral for the system to restart the engine. See Using start-stop (page 151). StartStop: Man. start required - The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required. 108 Information Displays Transmission Message Indicator Action Transmission malfunction red Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. Transmission overtemperatur amber Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Tyre pressure monitoring system Message Check ..... tyre! Check tyre pressures Check ..... tyre Indicator Action red The tyre indicated has continued to deflate. Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). red One or more of the tyres are significantly underinflated. This message may be displayed after a new sensor has been installed. Check the tyres and inflate them to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). amber The tyre indicated is significantly under-inflated. Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). You have installed a temporary spare wheel. Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with a sensor as soon as possible. When a malfunction occurs, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure. Tyre monitor malfunction amber Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, an unapproved accessory is interfering with the system or a general malfunction has been detected. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. When a malfunction occurs, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure. 109 Information Displays Message Inflate tyres for high speed Tyre sensors not detected Indicator Action amber The tyre pressures are not suitable for driving at 160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tyres to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). This message will be displayed for only a few seconds with a low tyre pressure warning. You have installed wheels and tyres that do not have sensors. The tyre pressures will not be monitored. - All sensors have malfunctioned or an unapproved accessory is interfering with the system. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Action Voice control Message Indicator Voice control Please speak - See Voice control (page 299). Voice control Not recognised - See Voice control (page 299). Voice control Not allowed - See Voice control (page 299). 110 Climate Control Warming the interior PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Direct the air towards your feet. In cold or humid weather conditions, direct some of the air towards the windscreen and the door windows. Outside air Keep the air intakes forward of the windscreen free from obstruction (snow, leaves etc.) to allow the climate control system to function effectively. Cooling the interior Direct the air towards your face. Recirculated air AIR VENTS CAUTION Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to mist up. If the windows mist up, follow the settings for defrosting and demisting the windscreen. Front air vents The air currently in the passenger compartment will be recirculated. Outside air will not enter the vehicle. Heating E71942 Heating performance depends on the temperature of the engine coolant. Air conditioning Note: The air conditioning operates only when the temperature is above 4°C (39°F). Note: If you use the air conditioning, the fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher. Air is directed through the evaporator where it is cooled. Humidity is extracted from the air to help keep the windows free of mist. The resulting condensation is directed to the outside of the vehicle and it is therefore normal if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle. General information on controlling the interior climate Fully close all the windows. 111 Climate Control Third row air vents Second row air vents C E73132 MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL Air distribution control A A B F B E C D E71379 E73131 A Windscreen B Footwell and windscreen C Footwell A Air flow through lower air vent D Face level and footwell B Air flow through upper air vent E Face level C Upper air vent F Face level and windscreen Use the upper air vents to defrost or demist the side windows. You can set the air distribution control to any position between the symbols. 112 Climate Control Blower Ventilation A E71378 Set the air distribution control, blower and air vents to suit your requirements. Air conditioning Switching the air conditioning on and off E75470 A Off If you turn the blower off, the air conditioning will turn off. When you turn the blower on again, the air conditioning will come on automatically. Note: If you switch the blower off, the windscreen may mist up. Recirculated air E73059 Press the button to toggle between outside air and recirculated air. Cooling with outside air Heating the interior quickly E71377 E71380 Cooling the interior quickly E71381 113 Climate Control Defrosting and demisting the windscreen You can switch the air conditioning and recirculated air on and off while the air distribution control is set to position A. Note: Turn the air conditioning on to assist windscreen and side window demisting. If necessary, switch the heated windows on. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 119). Note: Turn the heater control to maximum heat to assist windscreen and side window defrosting. Note: To defrost or demist the rear side windows, set the second row air vents to the defrosting and demisting position. See Air Vents (page 111). Reducing interior air humidity E71382 Make sure that the blower and A/C is on. The indicator in the switch will illuminate during defrosting and demisting. If you move the air distribution control to a position other than A, the A/C will remain on. E71383 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL Dual-zone E80737 114 Climate Control Triple-zone E70302 Note: For information on the automatic climate control, on vehicles fitted with a combined Navigation and automatic climate control system, see separate handbook. Your vehicle is fitted with either a dual-zone or triple-zone system. When the system is in mono mode, all the temperature zones are linked to the driver's zone. When you switch mono mode off, the dual-zone system allows you to set different temperatures for the driver's and passenger's side. On vehicles fitted with a triple-zone system, you can set a third temperature for the rear. Setting the temperature The system controls the temperature, amount and distribution of the air flow automatically and adjusts them according to the driving and weather conditions. Press the AUTO button to switch auto mode on. E70304 You can set the temperature between 16ºC (61ºF) and 28ºC (82ºF) in steps of 0.5ºC (1ºF). In position LO (below 16ºC [61ºF]) the system will switch to permanent cooling, in position HI (above 28ºC [82ºF]) to permanent heating, and will not regulate a stable temperature. Note: Avoid adjusting the settings when the vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. The system adjusts to the current circumstances automatically. For the system to function properly, the side and centre air vents should be fully open. Note: At low outside air temperatures, when the system is in auto mode, the air stream will be directed to the windscreen and the side windows as long as the engine is cold. 115 Climate Control Mono mode Low speed In mono mode, the temperature settings for both the driver’s and passenger’s side are linked. If you adjust the temperature using the rotary control on the driver’s side, the same temperature will be set for the passenger’s side. MONO is shown in the display. Use the buttons to adjust the blower speed. E94615 The blower setting is shown in the display. To switch mono mode off E95050 Select a temperature for the passenger’s side using the rotary control on the passenger’s side. Mono mode will switch off and MONO disappears from the display. The temperature for the driver’s side will remain unchanged. You can now adjust the driver's and passenger's side temperatures independently of each other. The temperatures are shown in the display. You can set a difference of up to 4ºC (8ºF). To return to auto mode, press the AUTO button. Air distribution To adjust air distribution, press the desired button. Any combination of settings can be selected simultaneously. Note: If you set a difference of greater than 4°C (8ºF), the temperature on the other side will be adjusted so that the difference remains at 4°C (8ºF). A B C E70308 Note: If you set one of the sides to HI or LO, both sides will be set to HI or LO. To switch mono mode back on E70306 A Footwell B Face level C Windscreen Windscreen defrosting and demisting Press the MONO button. MONO is shown in the display, and the passenger’s side temperature will be adjusted to the driver’s side temperature. E70309 Blower When you select windscreen defrosting and demisting, A, B and C switch off automatically and the air conditioning switches on. Outside air will flow into the vehicle. You cannot select recirculated air. High speed 116 Climate Control The blower speed and the temperature control operate automatically and cannot be adjusted manually. The blower is set to high speed and the temperature to HI. Dual-zone When you select windscreen defrosting and demisting, the heated screens switch on automatically and switch off after a short time. E70980 To return to auto mode, press the AUTO button. Use the buttons to switch the system on and off. Note: To defrost or demist the rear side windows, set the second row air vents to the defrost or demist position. See Air Vents (page 111). Triple-zone Switching the air conditioning on and off Press the button. A/C OFF or A/C ON is shown in the display. Recirculated air A E70312 Press button A to switch the system on and off. Press the button to change between outside air and recirculated air. Rear air conditioning (triple-zone automatic climate control) Note: When the system is in auto mode and the interior and exterior air temperatures are quite hot, the system selects recirculated air automatically to maximise cooling of the interior. Once the selected temperature is reached, the system will automatically reselect outside air . Note: This is a cooling system only. You can use it to cool the rear. The system will not change the rear setting to a temperature higher than the average of the two front temperature settings. Note: When switched off, you cannot set a temperature for the rear which is lower than the average of the two front temperature settings. Switching the automatic climate control on and off Note: When switched off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning system for both front and rear zones are switched off and recirculated air is selected. 117 Climate Control Note: When the front air conditioning is switched off, you cannot have rear air conditioning. Switching between front and rear air conditioning mode Rear blower High speed Low speed E94615 When the system is in rear air conditioning mode, use the buttons to adjust the blower speed. E70313 Press the button. The rear air conditioning symbol and the rear settings will be shown in the display. The blower setting is shown in the display. When the system is in rear air conditioning mode, you can select a temperature using the rotary control on the driver’s side. E95050 When the system is in rear air conditioning mode, press the AUTO button to return to auto mode. In auto mode, the rear blower is automatically controlled. AUTO is shown in the display. To return to the front settings, press the button again. If no button is pressed for a few seconds, the system will automatically return to the front settings. Switching the rear automatic climate control on and off Rear temperature Note: If you set different temperatures for the driver's side and rear, mono mode will be switched off. Note: When you press the MONO button, all three temperature zones will be adjusted to the temperature set for the driver's side. Switching the rear air conditioning on and off A E70312 When the system is in rear air conditioning mode, use the button to switch the system on and off. A/C OFF or A/C ON is shown in the display. 118 Climate Control When the system is in rear air conditioning mode, press button A to switch only the rear system on and off. The parking heater operates independently of the vehicle heater by heating the engine’s coolant circuit. It is fed from the vehicle fuel tank. You can also use it while the vehicle is in motion to help the vehicle heater warm up the interior more quickly. HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS Used properly, the parking heater provides the following benefits: Heated windows • • Use the heated windows to defrost or demist the windscreen or rear window. Note: The heated windows operate only when the engine is running. • Heated windscreen It preheats the interior of the vehicle. It keeps the windows clear of ice in the event of frost and prevents condensation. It avoids cold starts and allows the engine to reach operating temperature sooner. Note: The parking heater will only operate if there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6 gallons) of fuel in the fuel tank and the ambient temperature is below 15°C (59°F). The heater will not operate if the battery is low. E72506 Heated rear window Note: The heating depends on the outside air temperature. E72507 Note: When the parking heater is activated, exhaust fumes may come from under the sides of the vehicle. This is normal. Heated exterior mirrors Electric exterior mirrors are fitted with a heating element that will defrost or demist the mirror glass. They will switch on automatically when you switch the heated rear window on. Note: On vehicles with a manual heating, ventilation and air conditioning system, the heating of the vehicle interior is dependent on the temperature, air distribution and blower control settings. To prevent the battery from discharging: AUXILIARY HEATER • Parking heater WARNING The parking heater must not be operated at filling stations, near sources of combustible vapours or dust or in enclosed spaces. • 119 Once the parking heater has performed one heating cycle, the next programmed heating cycle will only be carried out if you have started the vehicle’s engine in between. After a heating cycle, drive the vehicle for at least the period of the heating cycle. Climate Control Programming the parking heater Note: The programmed time is the time at which you wish the vehicle to be warm and ready to drive, not the time at which the heater switches on. Park Heater Program 1 Note: You must programme the times at least 70 minutes in advance of the time you wish to set. Program 2 One-Time Active now Note: You must set the time and date correctly. See Clock (page 136). To programme the heating times: E74467 • • E70499 1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. 2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. 3. Highlight Park Heater and press the right arrow button. • The functions Program 1 and Program 2 allow you to programme up to two heating cycles for each day of the week. These times will remain stored and the heater will warm up the vehicle at these times on these days every week. The function One-Time allows you to programme one heating cycle for one specific day. The function Active now automatically switches on the heater. Programming the functions Program 1 and Program 2 Time 1 [07:55] Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday E74468 120 Climate Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Programming the function One-Time Highlight Program 1 and press the right arrow button. Highlight the day on which the heater should warm up the vehicle. Press the OK button to confirm the selection. A cross appears in the box next to the day to show that this day is selected. Continue in the same way to select all the days on which the heater should warm up the vehicle. To set the time at which the vehicle should be warmed up, highlight the time at the top of the display and press the right arrow button. Press the OK button and the hours flash. Use the up and down arrow buttons to adjust the individual settings and the left and right arrow buttons to move to the next or previous setting. When you have finished, press the OK button again to confirm the selection. 1. Highlight One-Time and press the right arrow button. 2. Press the OK button and the hours flash. Use the up and down arrow buttons to adjust the individual settings and the left and right arrow buttons to move to the next or previous setting. 3. When you have finished, press the OK button again to confirm the selection. Active now Highlight Active now and press the OK button. A cross appears in the box next to the function to show that the heater is activated. To deactivate the heater, highlight Active now and press the OK button again. Remote starting The parking heater may be started and switched off from a distance of up to 500 metres (1640 feet) using the supplied remote control transmitter. This range will vary depending upon local conditions and terrain, as well as battery condition. The remote control transmitter will indicate whether or not the signal has been received. The parking heater will operate for a maximum of 30 minutes. Parkheater Program 1 Note: The heater will operate, depending on the ambient temperature, for between 10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cool down after the heating period has elapsed, therefore a remote start more than 30 minutes before driving is not recommended. 07:55 01:12:2006 OK = change E74469 Note: The remote control may not always receive confirmation of a successful remote command at extended operating ranges. You can use the function Program 2 to set a second cycle, for example different times on different days or twice on the same day. The programming procedure is the same as for the function Program 1. 121 Climate Control Starting The LED on the transmitter flashes green or red for about two seconds. This indicates the signal was not transmitted correctly. Repeat the transmission. Hold the transmitter with the antenna upwards and press the ON button for at least two seconds. The LED on the transmitter lights up green to confirm the signal has been received. The LED on the transmitter illuminates orange for about two seconds before showing green or red. This indicates the transmitter batteries are weak and should be changed. Switching off Hold the transmitter with the antenna upwards and press the OFF button for at least two seconds. The LED on the transmitter lights up red to confirm the signal has been received. The LED on the transmitter flashes orange for about 5 seconds. This indicates that the signal was not transmitted. The transmitter batteries are discharged and should be changed as soon as possible. Remote start in combination with direct start or timer Changing the remote control battery Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority regarding recycling. 1 E114360 Remote start is integrated with normal heater control. Parking heaters started with direct start or timer functions can be switched off with the remote control transmitter and vice versa. 2 Feedback during starting and switching off E114361 1. The LED on the transmitter illuminates green for about two seconds. This indicates the signal has been received by the vehicle and the heater has started. Insert a screwdriver or other suitable tool into the slot on the back of the remote control, and unscrew the compartment cover. CAUTION The LED on the transmitter illuminates red for about two seconds. This indicates the signal has been received by the vehicle and the heater has switched off. Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 2. Carefully prise out the battery. 122 Climate Control 3. Install a new battery (3.3V type CR1-3N) with the + facing upwards. 4. Re-assemble the remote control. The fuel operated heater aids in warming the engine and the vehicle interior on vehicles with a diesel engine. It is switched on or off automatically depending on the outside air temperature and the coolant temperature, unless you have deactivated it. When the fuel operated heater is operating, Aux. Heater on is displayed in the information display. See Information Displays (page 88). Programming the transmitter Further transmitters may be used with the remote system, please consult your dealer. Up to a maximum of 3 separate remote controls may be added. When adding extra transmitters these must be programmed separately. To deactivate the fuel operated heater: Note: The heater must be switched off during programming. Note: The programming procedure may be repeated as often as is required. The oldest programmed transmitter will be deleted each time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install the battery in the new transmitter. Turn off the power to the receiver by removing fuse F32 from the engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 221). Wait for at least 5 seconds. Reconnect power to the receiver by replacing the fuse, and press the OFF button on the new transmitter within 5 seconds until the LED light turns off. The new transmitter is now programmed. E70499 1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. 2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button. 3. Highlight Aux. Heater and press the OK button to toggle the heater on and off. A cross appears in the box when the heater is activated. 4. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. Fuel operated heater (depending on country) WARNING The fuel operated heater must not be operated at filling stations, near sources of combustible vapours or dust or in enclosed spaces. 123 Climate Control Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on country) The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electrical heater) aids in warming the vehicle interior on vehicles with a diesel engine. It is switched on or off automatically depending on the outside air temperature, the coolant temperature and the alternator load. 124 Seats • SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION • bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. position the shoulder strap of the seat belt over the centre of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. MANUAL SEATS Moving the seats backwards and forwards E68595 WARNINGS Do not adjust the seats when the vehicle is moving. Only when you use the seat belt properly, can it hold you in a position that allows the airbag to achieve its optimum effect. When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a collision. We recommend that you: • • • • • sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forwards as possible, remaining comfortable. keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 250 millimetres (10 inches) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. E70728 WARNING Rock the seat backwards and forwards after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in its catch. 125 Seats Adjusting the lumbar support Adjusting the angle of the seatback E70729 E70731 Adjusting the height of the driver’s seat POWER SEATS 2-way electric seat 1 1 2 E70730 2 E70733 126 Seats 8-way electric seat 2 2 1 3 1 4 3 4 8 5 7 6 5 8 7 E70734 127 6 Seats HEAD RESTRAINTS REAR SEATS Adjusting the head restraint Second row seats Moving the seats backwards and forwards WARNINGS Raise the rear head restraint when the rear seat is occupied by a passenger. WARNING Rock the seat backwards and forwards after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in its catch. When using a forward facing child restraint on a rear seat, always remove the head restraint from that seat. E72644 E71879 Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forwards as possible, remaining comfortable. Removing the head restraint Press the locking buttons and remove the head restraint. 128 Seats Adjusting the seatback E72704 E72645 1. To recline the seatback, pull the lever on the outboard seats or the strap on the centre seat and lean back against the seatback until it reaches the desired position. 2. To raise the seatback, pull the lever up and push the seat cushion forwards using your weight. Easy entry position (vehicles with third row seats only) Note: You can move the outboard seats forwards to allow access to the third row seats. E72706 1. Pull the lever once. Fold the seatback forwards into the position shown and slide the complete seat forwards. When exiting the vehicle from the third row seats, pull the loop on the rear of the second row seat. 2. To return the seat to the seating position, slide the seat backwards. The seat will stop automatically and at a midway position. 129 Seats 3. Fold the seatback up until it engages. 4. To move the seat further back, pull the lever under the front of the seat and slide it backwards. 1. 2. 3. Folding the seatbacks down WARNING 4. When folding the seatbacks down, hold the seatback to avoid getting your fingers caught between the seatback and seat frame. 5. 6. Lower the head restraints. See Head Restraints (page 128). Slide the seats backwards as far as they will go. Insert the centre seat belt into the retainer in the roof. See Fastening the seat belts (page 31). On the outboard seats, pull the lever and fold the seatback into a sloped position. Pull the lever again and fold down the seatback. On the centre seat, pull the loop between the seat cushion and the seatback and fold down the seatback. To engage the seatbacks in the folded position, pull the lever or loop again and push the seatback firmly down until it latches into position. To return the seat to the seating position, pull the lever or loop and fold the seatback up until it engages. Third row seats WARNING Do not sit in a third row seat when the second row seat in front of it is folded flat. E72705 Moving the seats backwards and forwards (Galaxy) WARNING Rock the seat backwards and forwards after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in its catch. E72646 130 Seats Folding the seats flat WARNING When folding the seatbacks down, hold the seatback to avoid getting your fingers caught between the seatback and seat frame. 1 E72647 Adjusting the seatback (Galaxy) 1 E72707 A 3 B E75381 1. To recline the seatback, pull the strap and lean back against the seatback until it reaches the desired position. 2. To raise the seatback, pull the strap and let the seatback return to the upright position. 2 E72648 131 Seats 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Pull the loop at the rear of the seat cushion and fold the seat cushion forwards until it lies flat on the floor (1). Grasp the grip (A) and pull the loop (B) at the base of the seatback upwards and rearwards (2). Fold the seatback down flat to the floor using the grip (3). To return the seat to the seating position, grasp the grip and pull the seatback upwards and then rearwards. Fold the seat cushion back. 2 1 Creating a level load floor CAUTION When transporting a load with the seats folded flat, always fold the relevant carpeted cover forwards to cover the folded seats. 3 E72649 1. Turn the retainers on the rear of the third row seatbacks anti-clockwise through 90 degrees to release the carpeted cover. 2. Fold it forwards to cover up the folded seats. 3. To fix the cover back onto the seatbacks, fold it back and push the retainers into the seatback until they click into place. Note: When only the third row seats are folded flat, fold the covers forwards to cover up the base of the second row seats. The smaller flaps at the front of the cover should stand vertically against the second row seatbacks. 132 Seats Raising and Lowering the Temperature HEATED SEATS Note: Operating this function with the engine off will drain the battery. Press and hold the relevant button or press it repeatedly to select the desired temperature. VENTILATED SEATS Note: Operating this function with the engine off will drain the battery. E70601 E70601 E71224 Note: The number of illuminated lights beside the button indicates the selected step. Note: The heater setting is indicated in red. Note: When no light is illuminated, the heating is switched off. E70602 Note: Only the front seat settings are stored when you switch off the ignition. Note: The number of illuminated lights beside the button indicates the selected step. 133 Seats Note: The ventilation setting is indicated in blue. Note: When no light is illuminated, the ventilation is switched off. Note: The settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. Note: When the seat is being ventilated, the heater may switch on automatically. This is to prevent the flow of air becoming uncomfortably cool. Note: The air in the vehicle interior is used to ventilate the seats. The cooling effect therefore depends on the temperature of the vehicle interior. Switch on the air conditioning if necessary and set the air distribution to footwell. See Climate Control (page 111). Raising and Lowering the Temperature Press and hold the relevant button or press it repeatedly to select the desired temperature. FRONT SEAT ARMREST 1 3 2 E95256 134 Convenience features Note: If you operate the switch often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain time to prevent damage due to overheating. SUN SHADES Side windows A Note: The sun blind can only be operated when the ignition is on. A E74809 Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks (A). E125025 The sun blind is operated by a switch located between the sun visors. Roof (Galaxy) Opening and closing the sun blind A B E74808 Roof (S-MAX) E125146 WARNING Do not operate the sun blind unless it is free from obstruction. 135 A Press to close B Press to open Convenience features Opening and closing the sun blind automatically 3. Press and hold switch B to the first action point, until the blind fully opens. 4. Press and hold switch A to the first action point, until the blind fully closes. Press the switch to the second action point and release it. Press it again to stop the blind. If step 2 is not completed within 15 seconds, the relearning function will be interrupted. Turn the ignition off, wait for another 30 seconds and then turn the ignition back on again. Start the procedure once more from the beginning. Note: If this does not operate correctly, follow the relearning procedure below. Anti-trap function WARNINGS The anti-trap function is deactivated until the memory has been reset by the relearning procedure. Confirm that relearning has been completed by using automatic opening and closing. Careless closing of the blind can override the anti-trap function and cause injuries. INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER The sun blind will stop automatically while opening or closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Sun blind relearning WARNING The anti-trap function is not active during this procedure. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the way of the moving blind. E70723 Note: The relearning process must be started no later than 30 seconds after turning the ignition on. CLOCK Note: Some navigation systems will automatically set the date and time on the clock using GPS signals. In case the blind no longer opens or closes properly, follow this relearning procedure: 1. Press switch B to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds. 2. Press switch A to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds. Note: See General Information (page 88). 1. From the main menu, select the clock function. 2. Select the option required. 3. Press OK. 4. Using the right, left, up and down arrow buttons, select and change the value. 136 Convenience features 5. Press OK. ASHTRAY CIGAR LIGHTER Front ashtray CAUTIONS If you use the socket when the engine is not running, the battery may discharge. Do not hold the cigar lighter element pressed in. E72974 Note: Switch the ignition on to use the cigar lighter. You can also use it for up to 30 minutes after you have switched the ignition off. To empty, pull out the complete ashtray. Rear ashtray Note: You can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances that have a maximum current rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Ford accessory connectors or connectors specified for use with SAE standard sockets. E73705 To remove the ashtray, open it, press it down against the spring and remove it. E72972 Press the element in to use the cigar lighter. It will pop out automatically. AUXILIARY POWER POINTS CAUTION If you use the socket when the engine is not running, the battery may discharge. Note: You can use the socket when the ignition is switched off. 137 Convenience features Seat back trays Note: You can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances that have a maximum current rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Ford accessory connectors or connectors specified for use with SAE standard sockets. WARNING Do not use the trays when the vehicle is moving. Make sure that you secure the trays in the lowered position before setting off. S-Max E74130 Galaxy E72630 GLOVE BOX Cooled glove box Note: You can cool the glove box using air from the air conditioning system. E72977 CUP HOLDERS WARNING Do not place hot drinks in the cup holders when the vehicle is moving. E70885 138 Convenience features E72905 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS WARNING Do not drive with any storage compartment lid open. Make sure that you secure the lid before setting off. CAUTION Do not keep heat-sensitive items and liquids in any storage compartment. Front storage compartments E72905 Under seat storage compartment 1 E72978 2 E72981 Overhead storage compartments WARNING Do not place heavy objects in the overhead storage compartments. CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum permissible loads of 1 kilogramme (2.2 pounds) for the smaller compartment and 2 kilogrammes (4.4 pounds) for the larger compartment. E73704 139 Convenience features Vehicles with Premium sound system CAUTION Do not attempt to open the left-hand cover. MAP POCKETS E73067 Under floor storage compartment WARNING When you are using a child restraint with a support leg on a second row seat, make sure that you locate the support leg securely on the under floor storage compartment lid. Make sure that you install the foam spacer correctly inside the storage compartment and that you position the lid correctly. E74686 SEAT BACK TRAYS WARNING Do not use the trays when the vehicle is moving. Make sure that you secure the trays in the lowered position before setting off. E72585 140 Convenience features A B E86768 A Seat adjustment controls See Power Seats (page 126). B Memory pre-set buttons E72630 GLASSES HOLDER Up to four different driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored in the memory. Your preferred setting for the reverse mirror dipping feature can also be stored. See Electric exterior mirrors (page 76). Setting a memory pre-set Passive setting The vehicle stores the seating and mirror positions for up to four remote controls or passive keys. Next time the vehicle is unlocked, the position of the seat and mirrors will adjust to the last used position. E75193 MEMORY FUNCTION Each time you turn the ignition off, the current seat and mirror settings are stored on the remote control or passive key used. WARNINGS Before activating the seat memory, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts. Active setting 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired position. 3. Press and hold the desired pre-set button B until a single chime sounds to confirm. The memory store function cannot be used when the vehicle is moving. 141 Convenience features Recalling a stored seat position 5. Operate the same seat adjustment control in the opposite direction for at least 3 seconds. Keep it held until the seat stops at the mechanical end of its travel and a click is heard. Note: To stop seat movement during a recall, press any driver seat adjustment control, any of the memory buttons or any mirror control switch. Seat movement will also stop if you move the vehicle. CHILDMINDER MIRROR Passive recall Note: If more than one passive key is in range, the memory function will move to the settings of the first key stored. When you unlock the vehicle with the remote control or pull the driver door handle with a passive key in range, the seat and mirrors will move to the position stored on that remote control or passive key. Active recall Press the pre-set button associated with the desired driving position. The seat and mirrors will move to the position stored on that pre-set. E75192 Resetting the memory CD CHANGER If any seat position travel is interrupted (e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss of power supply), you will need to reset the memory. This is located under the front passenger seat. Note: Make sure all electrical accessories are switched off. AUXILIARY INPUT SOCKET 1. Turn the ignition to position II. 2. Operate the seat adjustment control to move the seat in the required direction until it stops. See Power Seats (page 126). A click will be heard. 3. Release the seat adjustment control and immediately press and hold the switch in the same direction for at least 3 seconds. Keep it held until the seat stops at the mechanical end of its travel and a click is heard. 4. Release the seat adjustment control. You can find the socket in the glove box or the centre console. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 290). USB PORT You can find the socket in the glove box or the centre console. See Connectivity (page 317). 142 Convenience features FLOOR MATS WARNING When using the floor mats, always make sure the floor mat is properly secured using the appropriate fixings and positioned so that it does not interfere with the operation of the pedals. 143 Starting and Stopping the Engine II The ignition is switched on. All electrical circuits are operational. Warning lamps and indicators illuminate. This is the key position when driving. You must also select it when being towed. GENERAL INFORMATION General points on starting If the battery has been disconnected the vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approx. 8 kilometres (5 miles) after reconnecting the battery. III The starter motor is activated. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. Any unusual driving characteristics during this period may be disregarded. KEYLESS STARTING WARNINGS The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as mobile phones. Starting the engine by towing or pushing WARNING Always check that the steering wheel lock is deactivated before attempting to move your vehicle. See Steering Wheel Lock (page 146). To prevent damage you must not push or tow start your vehicle. Use booster cables and a booster battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). Note: The ignition may automatically switch off after a period of time if your vehicle has been left unattended with the ignition on. This is to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. IGNITION SWITCH WARNING Note: A valid passive key must be located inside the vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine. Never return the key to position 0 or I when the vehicle is in motion. Note: To start your engine you must also fully depress the brake or clutch pedal, depending on the transmission fitted. E72128 E85766 0 The ignition is off. Ignition on I The ignition and all main electrical circuits are disabled. Press the button once. All electrical circuits are operational, warning lamps and indicators illuminate. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long to avoid discharging the battery. 144 Starting and Stopping the Engine Starting with manual transmission Type 1 Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during engine start will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Briefly press the button. 3. If the engine does not start, fully depress the brake and clutch pedals. Starting with automatic transmission Note: Releasing the brake pedal during engine start will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. E87382 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal. 3. Briefly press the button. 1. Hold the key next to the steering column shroud exactly as shown. 2. With the key in this position you can use the button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. Starting a diesel engine Type 2 Note: Engine cranking may not commence until the engine glow plug cycle has been completed. This may take several seconds in extremely cold conditions. Note: Continue to press the clutch or brake pedal until engine cranking begins. Failure to start The passive starting system will not function if: • The passive key frequencies are jammed. • The passive key battery is flat. If you are unable to start your vehicle carry out the following procedure. E87381 1. 145 Carefully prise out the cover. Starting and Stopping the Engine Stopping the engine when the vehicle is moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not be locked, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators may also be OFF. Press and hold the button for two seconds, or press three times within three seconds. E85767 2. Insert the key into the key holder. STEERING WHEEL LOCK WARNING Always check that the steering is unlocked before attempting to move your vehicle. E85766 3. With the key in this position you can press the button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. Vehicles without keyless starting Stopping the engine with the vehicle stationary To activate the steering wheel lock; 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Turn the steering wheel. Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators will be switched off. Vehicles with keyless starting Manual transmission Note: The steering wheel lock will not activate when the ignition is on or the vehicle is moving. Briefly press the button. Automatic transmission Your vehicle has an electronically controlled steering wheel lock. This operates automatically. 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 2. Briefly press the button. The steering wheel lock will activate after a short period of time once you have parked your vehicle and the passive key is outside of the vehicle. 146 Starting and Stopping the Engine Deactivating the steering wheel lock All vehicles Switch the ignition on, or: If the engine does not start, wait for a short period and try again. Vehicles with automatic transmission • Press the brake pedal. If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the flooded engine procedure. Vehicles with manual transmission • Press the clutch pedal. If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below -25°C (-13°F), press the accelerator pedal to the mid-way point of its travel and try again. STARTING A PETROL ENGINE Note: You can only operate the starter for a limited period of time, for example 10 seconds. The number of start attempts is limited to approximately six. If you exceed this limit, the system will not allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes. A message will be shown in the display. See Information Messages (page 101). Flooded engine Vehicles with manual transmission 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Start the engine. Vehicles with automatic transmission Cold or hot engine 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Fully depress the brake pedal. 4. Start the engine. Vehicles with manual transmission Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during engine start may stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Start the engine. All vehicles Vehicles with automatic transmission If the engine does not start, repeat the cold or hot engine procedure. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Engine idle speed after starting Note: Releasing the brake pedal during engine start may stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on. The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting will vary depending on the engine temperature. 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal. 3. Start the engine. The idle speed is automatically increased when the engine is cold this is to heat the catalytic converter. This keeps the vehicle emissions to an absolute minimum. The idle speed will slowly decrease to the normal level as the catalytic converter warms up. 147 Starting and Stopping the Engine During starting, the fuel injectors are turned off as long as the accelerator pedal is depressed. This can be used to drain excessive fuel from the intake manifold after several unsuccessful starting attempts. STARTING A PETROL ENGINE - E85 For general information on starting a petrol engine. See Starting a Petrol Engine (page 147). If the battery has been disconnected or after the fuel type has been changed, the idle speed may be irregular. This will improve after 10 to 30 seconds. Starting at low ambient temperatures When the temperature is lower than -10°C (14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, an engine block heater should be used to facilitate starting. See Engine Block Heater (page 149). Failure to do this will result in a non start. STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE Cold or hot engine All vehicles If the temperature is expected to remain below -10°C (14°F), it is recommended that you increase the proportion of petrol in the tank by topping up with 95 octane unleaded petrol if the tank is not already full. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrol will reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾ full tank from 85% to 70% and will considerably improve cold start capability. Note: When the temperature is below -15°C (5°F), you may need to crank the engine for up to 25 seconds. Note: Continue cranking the engine until it starts. Note: You can only operate the starter for a maximum of 30 seconds at a time. Switch the ignition on and wait until the glow plug indicator goes off. If, at very low temperatures, the tank is filled with only E85 and there is no way to use an engine block heater, you may experience difficulties starting the engine. If the engine fails to start, proceed as follows: Vehicles with manual transmission 1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. 2. Turn the ignition key to position III. 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Start the engine. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. CAUTION Vehicles with automatic transmission Release the ignition key as soon as the engine has started. 1. Select park or neutral. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal. 3. Start the engine. 3. Gradually release the accelerator pedal after five seconds of engine cranking or as the engine speed rises. If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1, 2 and 3, or connect an engine block heater for two hours before attempting another start. 148 Starting and Stopping the Engine If you drive only short distances or your journeys contain frequent stopping and starting, where there is increased acceleration and deceleration, occasional trips with the following conditions will assist the regeneration process: DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER The DPF forms part of the emissions reduction systems fitted to your vehicle. It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the exhaust gas. • Regeneration WARNING • Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The DPF regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after DPF regeneration, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. • • Drive your vehicle at a constant speed, preferably on a main road or motorway, for up to 20 minutes. Avoid prolonged idling and always observe speed limits and road conditions. Do not switch off the ignition. Use a lower gear than normal to maintain a higher engine speed during this journey, where appropriate. SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE CAUTION Vehicles with a turbocharger Avoid running out of fuel. CAUTION Do not switch the engine off when it is running at high speed. If you do, the turbocharger will continue running after the engine oil pressure has dropped to zero. This will lead to premature turbocharger bearing wear. Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odour and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to the high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal. Note: After you have switched your engine off the fans may continue to run for a short period of time. Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until the engine has reached idle speed and then switch it off. Unlike a normal filter which requires periodic replacement, the DPF has been designed to regenerate, or clean itself to maintain operating efficiency. The regeneration process takes place automatically. However, some driving conditions mean that you may need to support the regeneration process. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER CAUTION Make sure you disconnect the power cable from the engine heater connector before driving away. Note: The engine heater connector is located in the radiator grille at the front of your vehicle. 149 Starting and Stopping the Engine E97918 Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3 hours before starting the engine. 150 Start-Stop Note: If you stall the engine, and then depress the clutch pedal within a couple of seconds, the system will automatically restart the engine. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION CAUTION For vehicles with Start-stop the battery requirement is different. It must be replaced by one of exactly the same specification as the original. Note: The Start-stop indicator will illuminate green when the engine shuts down. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). Note: The Start-stop indicator will flash amber, requiring you to select neutral or depress the clutch pedal. In conjunction a message will be shown in the display. The system reduces fuel consumption and CO2 emissions by shutting down the engine when the vehicle is idling, for example at traffic lights. The engine will automatically restart when the driver presses the clutch pedal or when required by a vehicle system, for example to recharge the battery. Note: If the system detects a malfunction, it is deactivated. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician. Note: If you have switched the system off, the switch will be illuminated. To obtain maximum benefit from the system, move the gear lever to the neutral position and release the clutch pedal during any stop of longer than three seconds. Note: The system is on by default. To switch the system off, press the switch in the instrument panel. The system will only be de-activated for the current ignition cycle. To turn it on, press the switch again. For item location. See At a Glance (page 10). USING START-STOP WARNINGS The engine may restart automatically if required by the system. See Principle of Operation (page 151). To stop the engine Switch the ignition off before opening the bonnet or carrying out any maintenance. 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move the gear lever to the neutral position. 3. Release the clutch pedal. 4. Release the accelerator pedal. Always switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle, as the system may have shut down the engine but the ignition will still be live. The system may not shut down the engine under certain conditions, for example: Note: The system only operates when the engine is warm and the outside temperature is between 0°C (32°F) and 30°C (86°F). • • • • 151 To maintain the interior climate. Low battery voltage. The outside temperature is too low or too high. The driver's door has been opened. Start-Stop • • • • Low engine operating temperature. Low brake system vacuum. If a road speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) has not been exceeded. The driver's seat belt has not been fastened. To re-start the engine Note: The gear lever must be in the neutral position. Depress the clutch pedal. The system may automatically restart the engine under certain conditions, for example: • • Low battery voltage. To maintain the interior climate. 152 Eco Mode Anticipation PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Adjusting your vehicle speed and the distance to other vehicles without the need for heavy braking or acceleration will improve fuel consumption. The system assists the driver to drive more efficiently by constantly monitoring characteristics of gear changing, anticipation of traffic conditions and speeds on motorways and open roads. Efficient speed Note: These efficiency values do not result in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might vary as it is not only related to these driving disciplines but also influenced by many other factors such as short journeys and cold starts. Higher speeds use more fuel. Reducing your cruising speed on open roads will improve fuel consumption. Type 2 and 3 The relevant information will be shown in the display. Note: Frequent short journeys, where the engine does not fully warm up, will also increase fuel consumption. USING ECO MODE The value of these characteristics is represented by petals shown in the display, with five petals being the most efficient. The more efficiently you drive, the better the rating, and the better your overall fuel consumption. The system is accessed using the relevant information display menu. See Information Displays (page 88). Resetting Eco mode Type 1 Reset the average fuel consumption. Note: New values may take a short time to calculate. E121813 A B A Gear shifting B Anticipation C Efficient speed C Gear shifting Using the highest drivable gear appropriate for the road conditions will improve fuel consumption. 153 Fuel and Refuelling SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTIONS Do not use leaded petrol or petrol with additives containing other metallic compounds (e.g. manganese-based). They could damage the emission system. WARNINGS Stop refuelling after the fuel nozzle stops the second time. Additional fuel will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank which could lead to fuel overflowing. Fuel spillage could be hazardous to other road users. Do not use methanol instead of E85. Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel without additives or other engine treatments. Do not use any kind of flames or heat near the fuel system. The fuel system is under pressure. There is a risk of injury if the fuel system is leaking. Note: When using E85, you may experience a higher fuel consumption. CAUTION Note: Your vehicle will operate well on commercial quality 95 octane unleaded petrol, but only high quality E85 offers the same protection and performance. Do not use leaded petrol or petrol with additives containing other metallic compounds (e.g. manganese-based). They could damage the emission system. Use minimum 95 octane unleaded petrol that meets the specification defined by EN 228, or equivalent. You can also use a mixture of unleaded petrol and E85. Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel without additives or other engine treatments. Long-term storage FUEL QUALITY - PETROL Due to small amounts of corrosive impurities that may be found in the E85, it is recommended that you fill the tank with only 95 octane unleaded petrol prior to long-term storage of your vehicle. Use minimum 95 octane unleaded petrol that meets the specification defined by EN 228, or the equivalent national specification. FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol blends up to 10% (E5 and E10). WARNING FUEL QUALITY - E85 Do not mix diesel with oil, petrol or other liquids. This could cause a chemical reaction. WARNINGS Do not modify the fuel system configuration or the components in the system. CAUTIONS Do not add kerosene, paraffin or petrol to diesel. This could cause damage to the fuel system. Do not replace the fuel system or the components with parts not specially designed to be used with E85. 154 Fuel and Refuelling CAUTIONS Use diesel that meets the specification defined by EN 590, or the relevant national specification. CAUTIONS Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel. Do not switch the ignition off when driving. Note: The use of additives or other engine treatments not approved by Ford is not recommended. FUEL FILLER FLAP Note: We do not recommend the prolonged use of additives intended to prevent fuel waxing. WARNINGS Take care when refuelling to avoid spilling any residual fuel from the fuel nozzle. Long-term storage Do not use any kind of flames or heat near the fuel system. The fuel system is under pressure. There is a risk of injury if the fuel system is leaking. Most diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it is recommended to fill the tank with purely mineral diesel (where available) or add an anti-oxidant prior to long-term storage of your vehicle exceeding two months. Your dealer can help you with a suitable anti-oxidant. CAUTION If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel filler flap briefly from a distance not less than 200 millimetres (8 inches). CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARNING Note: Central locking also locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking and Unlocking (page 38). Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during use, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. Driving with a catalytic converter CAUTIONS Avoid running out of fuel. Do not crank the engine for long periods. E86613 1. Do not run the engine when a spark plug lead is disconnected. 155 Press the flap to open it. Open the flap fully until it engages. Fuel and Refuelling A A B E139203 E139202 Note: When you insert the fuel nozzle, a spring loaded inhibitor will open if the correct size nozzle is detected. This helps to avoid filling up with the wrong fuel. A Incorrect position B Correct position 3. Do not lift the nozzle during refilling. This can affect the flow of fuel and shut off of the fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full. 2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to and including the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel pipe opening. WARNING Stop refuelling after the fuel nozzle stops the second time. Additional fuel will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank which could lead to fuel overflowing. Fuel spillage could be hazardous to other road users. E139355 4. Operate the nozzle within the area shown. WARNINGS We recommend that you remove the fuel nozzle slowly to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle. Do not remove the nozzle from its fully inserted position during the entire refuelling process. 156 Fuel and Refuelling REFUELLING - E85 CAUTION Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with the incorrect fuel. This could damage the engine. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. E119081 5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it. After refuelling, allow 5 minutes of normal engine operation above 48 km/h (30 mph) to reduce the risk of an increased engine restart time. Refuelling with a fuel can Use the funnel which is located in the underfloor storage compartment behind the front seats. See Storage compartments (page 139). FUEL CONSUMPTION The CO2 and fuel consumption figures are derived from laboratory tests according to EEC Directive 80/1268/EEC and subsequent amendments and are carried out by all vehicle manufacturers. REFUELLING CAUTION Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with the incorrect fuel. This could damage the engine. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately. They are intended as a comparison between makes and models of vehicles. They are not intended to represent the real world fuel consumption you may get from your vehicle. Real world fuel consumption is governed by many factors including; driving style, high speed driving, stop/start driving, air conditioning usage, the accessories fitted and towing etc. Your Ford dealer can give you advice on improving your fuel consumption. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 157 Fuel and Refuelling S-MAX Fuel Consumption Figures Urban Extra-Urban Combined CO2 Emissions l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) g/km 1.6L EcoBoost (118kW/160PS), 6-speed manual transmission 9.4 (30.1) 5.7 (49.6) 7 (40.4) 164 2.0L Duratec-HE Stage IV (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission 11 (25.7) 6.4 (44.1) 8.1 (34.9) 194 2.0L Duratec-HE Stage V (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission 11.3 (25) 6.4 (44.1) 8.2 (34.4) 189 2.0L EcoBoost (149kW/203PS), 6-speed manual transmission 11.2 (25.2) 6.4 (44.1) 8.1 (34.9) 188 2.0L EcoBoost (177kW/240PS), 6-speed manual transmission 11.2 (25.2) 6.4 (44.1) 8.1 (34.9) 188 2.0L EcoBoost (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 11 (25.7) 6.4 (44.1) 8.1 (34.9) 189 2.0L EcoBoost (177kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 11.5 (24.6) 6.5 (43.5) 8.3 (34) 194 2.3L Duratec-HE (118kW/160PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 13.7 (20.6) 7.4 (38.2) 9.7 (29.1) 232 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission without start-stop 6.2 (45.6) 5 (56.5) 5.4 (52.3) 144 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission with start-stop 5.9 (47.9) 4.9 (57.6) 5.2 (54.3) 139 Variant 158 Fuel and Refuelling Urban Extra-Urban Combined CO2 Emissions l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) g/km 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi -DW Stage IV (103kW/140PS), Durashift 6-speed manual transmission 7.7 (36.7) 5 (56.5) 6 (47.1) 159 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi -DW Stage V, Durashift 6-speed manual transmission 6.7 (42.2) 4.7 (60.1) 5.4 (52.3) 143 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi -DW Stage IV (103kW/140PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 9.7 (29.1) 5.7 (49.6) 7.2 (39.2) 189 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi -DW Stage V (120kW/163PS), 6speed automatic transmission 7.4 (38.2) 5.2 (54.3) 6 (47.1) 159 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi -DW Stage IV (129kW/175PS), Durashift 6-speed manual transmission 8.9 (31.7) 5.2 (54.3) 6.6 (42.8) 174 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi -DW (147kW/200PS) 8.2 (34.4) 5.7 (49.6) 6.6 (42.8) 174 Variant 159 Fuel and Refuelling Galaxy Fuel Consumption Figures Urban Extra-Urban Combined CO2 Emissions l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) g/km 1.6L EcoBoost (118kW/160PS), 6-speed manual transmission 9.7 (29) 5.8 (48.7) 7.2 (39.2) 169 2.0L Duratec-HE Stage IV (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission 11.2 (25.2) 6.5 (43.5) 8.2 (34.4) 197 2.0L Duratec-HE Stage V (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission 11.3 (25) 6.4 (44.1) 8.2 (34.4) 189 2.0L EcoBoost (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 11 (25.7) 6.4 (44.1) 8.1 (34.9) 189 2.3L Duratec-HE -MI4 (118kW/160PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 13.8 (20.5) 7.5 (37.7) 9.8 (28.8) 235 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission without start-stop 6.2 (45.6) 5 (56.5) 5.4 (52.3) 144 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission with start-stop 5.9 (47.9) 4.9 (57.6) 5.2 (54.3) 139 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage IV (103kW/140PS), Durashift 6-speed manual transmission 7.7 (36.7) 5 (56.5) 6 (47.1) 159 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, Durashift 6-speed manual transmission 6.7 (42.2) 4.7 (60.1) 5.4 (52.3) 143 Variant 160 Fuel and Refuelling Urban Extra-Urban Combined CO2 Emissions l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) l/100 km (mpg) g/km 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage IV (100kW/140PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 9.7 (29.1) 5.7 (49.6) 7.2 (39.2) 189 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V (120kW/163PS), 6-speed automatic transmission 7.4 (38.2) 5.2 (54.3) 6 (47.1) 159 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi -DW Stage IV (129kW/175PS), Durashift 6-speed manual transmission 9.1 (31) 5.3 (53.3) 6.7 (42.2) 179 8.4 (33.6) 5.8 (48.7) 6.8 (41.5) 179 Variant 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi -DW (147kW/200PS) 161 Transmission MANUAL TRANSMISSION CAUTION Do not engage reverse gear when the vehicle is moving. This can cause damage to the transmission. N Neutral D Drive S Sport mode and manual shifting WARNING Apply the brakes before moving the selector lever and keep them applied until you are ready to move off. Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed. This will increase the tendency for your vehicle to creep when you have selected a drive gear. Press the button on the selector lever to select reverse and park. The selector lever position will be shown in the information display. E99067 Park On some vehicles it is necessary to raise the collar whilst selecting reverse gear. WARNINGS Select park only when your vehicle is stationary. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Apply the parking brake and select park before leaving your vehicle. Make sure that the selector lever is latched in position. Selector lever positions Note: An audible warning will sound if you open the driver's door and you have not selected park. In this position, power is not transmitted to the drive wheels and the transmission is locked. You can start the engine with the selector lever in this position. S Reverse WARNING E80836 P Park R Reverse Select reverse only when your vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle speed. 162 Transmission Neutral Drive modes In this position, power is not transmitted to the drive wheels but the transmission is not locked. You can start the engine with the selector lever in this position. The transmission will select the appropriate gear for optimum performance based on ambient temperature, road gradient, vehicle load and driver input. Drive Hints on driving with an automatic transmission Select drive to shift automatically through the forward gears. Moving off Sport mode and manual shifting 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal. Stopping 1 1. Release the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. 2. Apply the parking brake. S Kickdown 2 Press the accelerator pedal fully with the selector lever in the drive position to select the next lowest gear for optimum performance. Release the accelerator pedal when you no longer require kickdown. S E80837 Note: A shift will occur only when the vehicle speed and the engine speed are appropriate. Emergency park position release lever Note: When you select position S, a gear change may occur depending on the accelerator pedal position in relation to actual vehicle speed. Use the lever to move the selector lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a flat battery. Activate sport mode by moving the selector lever to position S. Sport mode will remain active until you shift manually up or down the gears. Select manual shifting to shift manually through the forward gears. Push the selector lever forwards to shift down and pull it backwards to shift up. 163 Transmission 3 4 2 1 E81705 1. Insert a small flat-bladed tool into the slot. 2. Turn the tool through 90 degrees. 3. Push downwards on the tool to detach the gaiter frame from the trim panel. 4. Push downwards on the gaiter frame to release the lever and move the selector lever from the park position. 5. Pull upwards on the gaiter until the gaiter frame engages in the trim panel. Note: If position P is selected again, this procedure must be repeated. 164 Brakes The ABS will not eliminate the risks when: • you drive too close to the vehicle in front of you • the vehicle is aquaplaning • you take corners too fast • the road surface is poor. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, the brake lamps may flash if you brake heavily. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a concern. In normal operation, the system may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually caused by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. PARKING BRAKE Applying the parking brake Disc brakes Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. Dab the brake pedal when driving from a car wash to remove the film of water. ABS WARNING The ABS does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. The ABS helps you to maintain full steering and directional stability when you brake heavily in an emergency, by preventing the road wheels from locking. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES E73224 WARNING Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. Make sure that the parking brake is applied before you release the lever. Note: Do not press the release button when you apply the parking brake. 165 Brakes Parking on a hill 1. Press the brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards to its fullest extent. If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn the front wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Parking on a hill If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn the front wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Applying the EPB Releasing the parking brake 1. Press the brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards slightly, press the release button and push the lever downwards. ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE The electric parking brake (EPB) replaces the conventional handbrake. It is operated by a switch located in the centre console. E70528 Pull up the switch once to apply the EPB. WARNINGS Always apply the EPB before leaving the vehicle. The brake system warning lamp illuminates to confirm that the EPB is now applied. Vehicles with manual transmission should always be left in first or reverse gear. Note: The brake system warning lamp will remain illuminated for a short period if you turn the ignition to position 0 or remove the key. Vehicles with automatic transmission should always be left with the selector lever in position P. Automatic application of the EPB WARNING Note: Under certain conditions for example on a steep hill, when the vehicle has been parked with the EPB applied, the EPB performs an automatic re-clamp function. This will occur approximately three minutes after the EPB has been applied. The EPB will not automatically apply on vehicles with a keyless start or keyless entry system. You must apply the EPB using the EPB switch. When you turn the ignition off, the cluster will remain on for several minutes. Note: You may notice various noises when the EPB is applied and released. This is normal and no cause for concern. The EPB will automatically apply when you remove the key from the ignition during this period. 166 Brakes Preventing automatic application of the EPB If you apply the EPB while the vehicle is moving, the brake system warning lamp illuminates and a warning chime will sound. WARNINGS Do not leave the vehicle if you have not applied the EPB. Remember that if you press down the switch while removing the key from the ignition the EPB will not be applied. At speeds above 6 km/h (4 mph), the braking force is applied as long as you hold the switch in the on position. The EPB will be applied until you release or press down the switch, or press the accelerator pedal further. Make sure that the vehicle’s wheels are securely wedged if you park the vehicle with the EPB released to prevent it from rolling away. Releasing the EPB Automatic release - drive away release (DAR) Note: On vehicles with automatic transmission, the driver's door must be closed and the driver's seatbelt must be fastened before the DAR will operate. Note: If the EPB warning lamp stays illuminated the EPB will not automatically release. You must release the EPB using the EPB switch. E70529 Hold the switch pressed while you switch off the ignition or while you remove the key from the ignition. Note: The engine must be running and the accelerator pedal must be pressed before the DAR will operate. WARNING Note: The clutch pedal must be fully depressed before the DAR will operate. If you prevented the EPB from applying while turning off the ignition, it will remain off when you remove the key. Engage first or reverse gear, move off as normal using the accelerator and clutch pedals and the EPB will be automatically released. Applying the EPB when the vehicle is moving The brake system warning lamp will go off to confirm that the EPB has been released. WARNING Note: On vehicles with manual transmission, if the gear lever is in neutral when you release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal, the EPB will be released automatically. With the exception of emergency conditions (for example, the brake pedal does not work or is blocked), do not apply the EPB while the vehicle is moving. On bends, on poor road surfaces or weather conditions, emergency braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of control or off the road. 167 Brakes Cut in the power supply Note: The EPB also makes moving off on a slope easier and prevents the vehicle from rolling in an undesired direction. The brakes are released automatically once the clutch is engaged and the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. WARNING You will not be able to apply or release the EPB if there is a cut in the power supply, for example a flat battery, failure of the alternator or vehicle electronics. If the battery is flat, use booster cables and a booster battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). Manual release Note: To release the EPB, the ignition must be in position II. E70529 Hold the brake pedal depressed and press down the switch. The brake system warning lamp will go off to confirm that the EPB has been released. Moving off with a trailer (vehicles with manual transmission) Depending on the gradient and the weight of the trailer, the vehicle and trailer may roll backwards slightly when you move off on a slope. To prevent this happening, deactivate the DAR and release the EPB manually as follows: 1. Pull up the switch and hold it in this position. 2. Move off as normal and then press down the switch when you notice that the engine has developed sufficient driving force. 168 Stability Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Stability control (ESP) warning lamp Electronic stability programme (ESP) While driving, it flashes during activation of the system. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). WARNING Emergency brake assist The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. The system will detect when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It will provide maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. The system can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. B B USING STABILITY CONTROL B Note: The system will be switched on automatically every time you switch the ignition on. A A B A Vehicles with stability control (ESP) switch E72903 A Without ESP B With ESP E71225 Press and hold the switch for one second. The switch will illuminate. A message will be shown in the display. See Information Messages (page 101). The system supports stability when the vehicle starts to slide away from your intended path. This is performed by braking individual wheels and reducing engine torque as needed. Press the switch again to turn the system on. The system also provides an enhanced traction control function by reducing engine torque if the wheels spin when you accelerate. This improves your ability to pull away on slippery roads or loose surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting wheel spin in hairpin bends. For item location: See At a Glance (page 10). Vehicles without stability control (ESP) switch Turn the system off and on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 88). 169 Hill Start Assist PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The system makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. When the system is active, the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for a short time after you release the brake pedal. During this time, you have time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal and pull away. The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. E70499 Hill Launch Off Auto Manual WARNING The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the parking brake and select first or reverse gear. USING HILL START ASSIST E74629 The HLA can operate in either automatic or manual mode. If you select automatic mode, the HLA is activated automatically when the vehicle is on a slope and you press the brake pedal. If you select manual mode, you must activate the HLA using the brake pedal. 1. 2. 3. To set the HLA mode: 4. 5. 170 Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Setup with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Hill Launch and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. If Off is selected, the HLA is switched off and cannot be activated either automatically or manually. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. Hill Start Assist Note: When HLA is in manual activation mode, only use the HLA when pulling away uphill on gradients greater than 3%. If the vehicle is on the flat or on a downhill slope, an active HLA will make it difficult to pull away smoothly. 1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal depressed. 2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope and the right driving direction is selected (first gear if the vehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gear if the vehicle is pointing downhill), the HLA will be activated automatically. Hill Launch Assist active is displayed in the information display. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two to three seconds. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released automatically. Activating the HLA WARNINGS You must remain in the vehicle once you have activated the HLA. Any attempt to leave the vehicle will deactivate the HLA automatically. The HLA is active only if the message Hill Launch Assist active is displayed in the information display. During all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the HLA and intervening, if required. To activate the HLA in manual mode: 1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal depressed. 2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further until you hear a chime and Hill Launch Assist active is displayed in the information display. The HLA is now active. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two to three seconds. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released automatically. You can activate the HLA only if the following conditions have been met: • • • • • • The engine is running. The HLA is switched on (automatic or manual mode). The parking brake or electric parking brake (EPB) is fully disengaged. On vehicles with manual transmission, the clutch pedal is pressed. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the driver's door is closed. No failure mode is present. To activate the HLA in automatic mode: 171 Hill Start Assist WARNING When HLA is active and the system detects a malfunction, the HLA is deactivated and the message Please use park brake! followed by Hill Launch A .not available is displayed in the information display. The vehicle is still safe to be driven and can be repaired during the next service. The message Hill Launch A. not available is also displayed in the information display with manual activation during a malfunction or if one of the activation criteria is not met. If you have switched the HLA off, no messages will be displayed. Deactivating the HLA To deactivate the HLA, perform one of the following: • • • • Apply the parking brake or electric parking brake (EPB) . Wait for two to three seconds until the HLA deactivates automatically. If a forward gear was selected when the HLA became active, select reverse gear. If reverse gear was selected when the HLA became active, select a forward gear. Hill Launch Assist off is displayed in the information display. 172 Active suspension System malfunction PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The active suspension system will switch off automatically if it malfunctions. The suspension will be set to a fail-safe condition that will enable you to continue driving but you will not be able to change the suspension setting. Have this checked as soon as possible. The active suspension provides improved handling, comfort and stability by continuously adjusting the damper properties to the current road and driving conditions. This system in conjunction with the ABS system offers the benefit of potentially shorter stopping distances on rough road surfaces. Depending on your preferences and driving style, you can choose between three different settings: Comfort This provides a softer driving feel. Normal Normal setting. Sport This provides a harder, sportier ride. USING ACTIVE SUSPENSION Selecting a setting Note: After you select a setting, you may not immediately notice a difference in the vehicle's handling. The effect of the continuously controlled damping depends on the road surface and driving conditions. E70475 You can change the setting while driving. 173 Parking Aids Note: The parking aid may emit false tones if it detects a signal using the same frequency as the sensors or if the vehicle is fully laden. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING The parking aid does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Note: The outer sensors may detect the side walls of a garage. If the distance between the outer sensor and the side wall remains constant for three seconds, the tone will switch off. As you continue, the inner sensors will detect rearward objects. CAUTIONS Vehicles fitted with a trailer tow module not approved by us may not correctly detect obstacles. PARKING AID The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections. Switching the parking aid on and off The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. Note: The parking aid switches off automatically when you start the engine or when you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph). The parking aid does not detect obstacles moving away from the vehicle. They will only be detected shortly after they start to move towards the vehicle again. Note: The front and rear sensors are always activated or deactivated together. The parking aid is per default off. To switch the parking aid on, press the switch in the instrument panel or select reverse gear. Take particular care when reversing with a tow ball arm or rear fitted accessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as the rear parking aid will only indicate the distance from the bumper to the obstacle. The light in the switch illuminates when the parking aid is activated. To turn it off, press the switch again. Manoeuvring with the parking aid If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors briefly from a distance not less than 20 centimetres (8 inches). Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ball arm, the parking aid is deactivated automatically when any trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are connected to the 13-pin socket via a trailer tow module we have approved. E72902 Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice and snow. Do not clean with sharp objects. Note: If a high pitch warning tone sounds for three seconds and the light in the switch is flashing, it indicates a malfunction. The system will be disabled. Have the system checked by properly trained technicians. 174 Parking Aids You will hear an intermittent tone at a distance of up to approximately 150 centimetres (59 inches) between the obstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimetres (31 inches) between the obstacle and front bumper and 50 centimetres (20 inches) to the side. Decreasing the distance accelerates the intermittent tone. A continuous tone will start at a distance of less than 30 centimetres (12 inches). You will hear an alternating tone from the front and rear if obstacles are closer than 30 centimetres (12 inches) to the front and rear bumpers. 175 Rear view camera S-MAX PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The camera is a visual aid for use when reversing. WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. CAUTIONS If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the camera briefly from a distance not less than 20 centimetres (8 inches). E99105 Do not apply pressure to the camera. Galaxy Note: Keep the camera free from dirt, ice and snow. Do not clean with sharp objects, degreaser, wax or organic products. Use only a soft cloth. During operation, guide lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle's path and approximate distance from rearward objects. REAR VIEW CAMERA E124349 WARNINGS The operation of the camera may vary depending on the ambient temperature, vehicle and road conditions. Activating the rear view camera CAUTION The camera may not detect objects that are close to the vehicle. The distances shown in the display may differ from the actual distance. With the ignition and the audio unit switched on, engage reverse gear. The image is displayed on the screen. Do not place objects in front of the camera. The camera is located on the luggage compartment lid near the handle. 176 Rear view camera The camera may not operate correctly in the following conditions: • Dark areas. • Intense light. • If the ambient temperature increases or decreases rapidly. • If the camera is wet, for example in rain or high humidity. • If the camera's view is obstructed, for example by mud. D E D C C B B A A Using the display CAUTIONS Obstacles above the camera position will not be shown. Inspect the area behind your vehicle if necessary. Marks are for general guidance only, and are calculated for vehicles in maximum load conditions on an even road surface. The lines show a projected vehicle path (based on the current steering wheel angle) and the distance from the exterior mirrors and rear bumper. E99458 177 A Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1 metre (4 inches) B Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) C Amber - 1 metre (39 inches) Rear view camera D Amber - 2 metres (79 inches) E Shows the centre line of the projected vehicle path Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lines on the screen show the vehicle direction and not the trailer. Deactivating the rear view camera Note: Disengage reverse gear. The display will stay on for a short period before switching off. The system will automatically switch off once the vehicle speed has reached approximately 15 km/h (9 mph). Vehicles with parking aid The display will additionally show a coloured distance bar. This guide indicates the distance from the rear bumper to the detected obstacle. These are colour coded as follows: • Green - 0.8 to 1.5 metres (31 to 59 inches). • Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 metre (12 to 31 inches). • Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less. 178 Cruise Control Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch to store and maintain your current speed. The cruise control indicator illuminates. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Cruise control allows you to control your speed using the switches on the steering wheel. You can use cruise control when you exceed 30 km/h (20 mph). Changing the set speed WARNING When you are going downhill, your speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes. Change down a gear and press the RES switch to assist the system in maintaining the set speed. USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNING Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on twisty roads or when the road surface is slippery. Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return to the speed that you previously set. Switching cruise control on Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch to accelerate or decelerate. Cancelling the set speed E70612 Setting a speed E70614 Press the brake pedal or the CAN switch. The system will no longer control your speed. The cruise control indicator will go off but the system will retain the speed that you previously set. E70615 179 Cruise Control Resuming the set speed E70616 Press the RES switch. The cruise control indicator illuminates and the system will attempt to resume the speed that you previously set. Switching cruise control off E70613 Press the OFF switch. The system will not retain the speed that you previously set. The cruise control indicator will go off. 180 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Note: When adaptive cruise control is activated, you may hear some unusual sounds during automatic braking. This is normal and caused by the automatic braking system. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS The system is not a collision warning or avoidance system. The separate forward alert function provides a collision warning and mitigation feature. See Forward alert function (page 186). You must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front. Note: Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt, metal badges or objects, including vehicle front protectors and additional lights which may prevent the sensor from operating. The system is designed to help you maintain a gap from the vehicle ahead or a set road speed if there is no slower vehicle ahead. The system is intended to provide enhanced operation of the vehicle when following other vehicles which are in the same lane and travelling in the same direction. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when adaptive cruise control is used. You must always pay attention to the traffic conditions and intervene when adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance. The system is based on the use of a radar sensor which projects a beam directly forward of the vehicle. This beam will detect any vehicle ahead within the system's range. The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. The system does not brake for slow or stationary vehicles, pedestrians, objects in the road, oncoming and crossing vehicles. The radar sensor is mounted behind the front grille. CAUTIONS Only use adaptive cruise control when conditions are favourable, for example on motorways and main roads with steady free flowing traffic. Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. Do not use on icy or slippery roads. Do not use the system when entering or leaving a motorway. The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle other than the one expected or not detect any vehicle at all. 181 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Detection beam issues Automatic braking with ACC WARNINGS You must take immediate action once alerted, as the adaptive cruise control braking will not be sufficient to keep a safe distance to the vehicle in front. In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. When following a vehicle in front of you, adaptive cruise control will not automatically decelerate to a stop. The system will automatically brake for you, if required to maintain the set gap between your vehicle and the one detected in front. This braking capacity is limited to approximately 30% of the total manual braking capacity to ensure smooth and comfortable cruising. If the car needs to brake more heavily than this, and you do not intervene by braking manually, an alarm will sound and a warning symbol will be displayed in the cluster. E71621 Detection issues can occur: • • With vehicles that edge into your lane that can only be detected once they have moved fully into your lane (A). Motorcycles may be detected late, or not at all. (B) With vehicles in front when going into and coming out of a bend (C). The detection beam will not follow sharp curves in the road. USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL The system is operated by adjustment controls mounted on the steering wheel. In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and intervene if necessary. 182 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Vehicles without speed limiter A E D ACC gap increase E ACC gap decrease Switching the system on Press switch A. The system is set to standby mode. B Setting a speed D Note: The system must be in standby mode. C F E124908 A ACC on B ACC cancel C ACC off D ACC gap increase E ACC gap decrease G E133884 Vehicles with speed limiter A E F Set speed increase G Set speed decrease Press switch F or switch G to select your desired cruise speed. The speed is displayed in the information display and stored as the set speed. B Changing the set speed D Note: Vehicle speed may be increased and decreased at intervals of 5 km/h or 5 mph. C Note: If the system does not react to these changes the reason may be that the gap interval to the vehicle in front prevents an increase in speed. E124909 A ACC on/off B ACC cancel C Speed limiter on/off 183 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Note: The gap setting is time dependant and therefore the distance will automatically adjust with your speed. For example on a gap setting of four bars, the time gap is 1.8 seconds. This will mean that at a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph), the distance to the vehicle in front will be maintained at 50 metres (164 feet). F G Note: If the accelerator is depressed for a short period, for example when overtaking, the system is temporarily deactivated and then reactivated when the accelerator pedal is released. A message is displayed in the information display. E133884 Press switch F to increase or switch G to decrease the set speed until the desired set speed is shown in the information display. The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed. Note: The gap setting will remain unchanged during ignition cycles. Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1 mph may be set by pressing switch H. H E82311 The distance between you and the vehicle detected in front is maintained by a variable setting. There are five steps which are represented by horizontal bars displayed in the information display. One bar denotes the smallest gap and five bars indicate the largest gap. These bars are shown empty when in standby mode and filled when in active mode. E133885 H ACC resume If no vehicle is detected in front, then only your vehicle is displayed in the information display below the bars. The system will maintain the set speed when conditions permit. The set gap is maintained and displayed. Setting the vehicle gap CAUTION Use the appropriate gap setting in accordance with local traffic regulations. If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, the display will show another vehicle above the horizontal bars: 184 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Vehicles with speed limiter Press switch A to turn the system off. Note: When deactivating the system by pressing switch A, the stored speed is not retained. Automatic deactivation E82312 Note: If the engine speed drops too low, a message is displayed in the information display instructing you to change down a gear (manual transmission only). If you do not follow this recommendation then the system will go into automatic deactivation mode. This is a follow mode, and the system will accelerate or decelerate as necessary to maintain the set gap. Press switch E to decrease the gap or switch D to increase the gap. The gap selected will be represented by the number of bars in the display. Note: The system will not operate if the electronic stability programme (ESP) has been manually switched off. Note: The recommended gap setting is four to five bars. The system is dependent on various other safety systems, for example ABS and ESP. If any of these systems are malfunctioning or reacting to an emergency, the system is automatically deactivated. Temporarily deactivating the system Note: The system is cancelled when the gear lever is moved to a neutral position or if the accelerator pedal or clutch is depressed for a long period of time In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message is displayed in the information display See Information Messages (page 101). You must then intervene and adapt your driving and speed to vehicles in front. Press either the brake or switch B to cancel the system. The system will return to standby mode allowing you full manual control of the vehicle. The set speed and gap setting are retained in the memory. An automatic deactivation can be due to the: To resume adaptive cruise control press switch H. The system will resume with the previously set speed and vehicle gap setting if conditions permit. • • • Switching the system off Vehicles without speed limiter • • • Press switch C to turn the system off. Note: When deactivating the system by pressing switch C, the stored speed is not retained. 185 vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h (20 mph) wheels losing traction brake temperature is high, for example when driving on mountainous or hilly roads engine speed is too low radar sensor is covered parking brake or electric parking brake (EPB) is applied. Adaptive cruise control (ACC) FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION The system assists you by warning of the risk of a collision with a vehicle in front. WARNINGS Never wait for a collision warning. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the system is used. The system alerts you by warning chimes and a visual warning in the information display. See Information Messages (page 101). Brake support is activated to enable full braking effectiveness, and reduce the severity of a collision with the vehicle in front. The system will only react to vehicles in front travelling in the same direction and will not react to slow or stationary vehicles. Switching the system on and off Never drive in a manner to provoke the system. The system is designed to assist in emergencies only. Note: When the system is switched off, a warning indicator will remain illuminated in the information display. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). CAUTIONS Warnings may be triggered late, be absent or triggered unnecessarily due to detection beam issues. See Principle of Operation (page 181). Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged during ignition cycles. The system can be switched on and off using the information display. See General Information (page 88). The system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control and therefore has the same limitations. See Principle of Operation (page 181). Adjusting the warning sensitivity You may adjust the system warning sensitivity using the buttons on the steering wheel. See General Information (page 88). This controls how early the visual and audible warning is activated. Note: The brake support system only reduces the collision speed if you brake immediately once alerted. Note: If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then braking is implemented with full brake function, even if the force on the pedal is light. Note: Brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking and the brakes are applied gently, which may be noticed as a slight jerk. Note: The collision alerts will only occur if the system is switched on, however the brake support is always on and cannot be turned off. Note: The system may be used with or without the Adaptive cruise control system being activated. 186 Speed Limiter PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING When you are going downhill, your speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes but a warning will be given. The system allows you to set a speed, to which the vehicle then becomes limited. The set speed will become the effective maximum speed of the vehicle, but with the option to temporarily exceed this limit if required. E70615 Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch to select your desired speed limit. The speed is indicated in the information display and stored as the set speed. USING THE SPEED LIMITER Press button B to cancel the limiter and place it in standby mode. The information display will confirm deactivation by showing the set speed crossed out. The system is operated by adjustment controls mounted on the steering wheel. Press button A to switch the system on and off. The information display will prompt for a speed to be set. Note: The set speed limit can be intentionally exceeded for a short period if required, for example when overtaking. B E70616 Press the RES button to resume the limiter. The information display will confirm the system is active by showing the set speed again. Intentionally exceeding the speed limit A Depress the accelerator hard close to the full pedal travel and the limit will temporarily deactivate. The system will reactivate once the vehicle speed drops below the set speed. E124874 Setting the speed limit Use the cruise control switches to alter the maximum speed setting. 187 Speed Limiter System warnings If the set limit is accidentally exceeded the information display will show the set speed flashing together with an audible warning chime. If the set limit is intentionally exceeded the information display will show the set speed crossed out. 188 Driver Alert Note: Keep the windscreen free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Note: The system is intended as a driver aid when driving on fast main roads and motorways. Note: The system calculates an alertness level at vehicle speeds above approximately 65 km/h (40 mph). At all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required. If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function. The system automatically monitors your driving behaviour using various inputs including the front camera sensor. Take regular rest breaks as required and do not wait for the system to warn you if you feel tired. If the system detects that you are becoming drowsy or there is a deterioration in your driving, the system will alert you. Take rest breaks only where it is safe to do so. USING DRIVER ALERT Certain driving styles and behaviour may result in the system issuing a warning even if you are not feeling Switching the system on and off Note: The system status will remain unchanged during ignition cycles. tired. Activate the system using the information display. See Information Displays (page 88). CAUTIONS In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray and large contrasts in lighting can all influence the sensor. Once activated the system will calculate your alertness level based upon your driving behaviour in relation to the lane markings, and other factors. The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. System warnings The system may not operate in areas during roadworks construction. Note: The system will not issue warnings below approximately 65 km/h (40 mph). The system may not operate on roads with sharp bends or narrow lanes. The warning system is in two stages. At first the system issues a temporary warning that a rest should be taken. This message will only appear for a short time. If a rest is not then taken a further warning may be issued which will remain in the information display until cancelled. See Information Messages (page 101). Do not carry out windscreen repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor. If your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us, the system may not function correctly. Press OK on the steering wheel control to remove the warning. 189 Driver Alert System display Resetting the system When active the system will run automatically in the background and only issue warnings if required. You can view the status at any time using the information display. See General Information (page 88). You can reset the system by either: • Switching the ignition off and on. • Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver's door. The alertness level is shown by six steps as a coloured bar. E131358 Alertness level is fine, no rest required. E131359 Alertness level is critical, indicating that a rest should be taken as soon as safely possible. The status bar will travel from left to right as the calculated alertness level decreases. As the rest icon is approached the colour turns from green to yellow and then finally red when a rest break must be taken. • • • Green - No rest required. Yellow - First (temporary) warning. Red - Second warning. Note: The alertness level will be shown in grey if the camera sensor cannot track the road lane markings or if the vehicle speed drops below approximately 65 km/h (40 mph). 190 Lane Departure Warning Note: The system is intended as a driver aid when driving on fast main roads and motorways. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Note: The system may not operate during hard braking or acceleration and, when you are intentionally steering the vehicle. Note: The system will operate with a minimum of one tracked lane marking. At all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required. Note: The system will only operate above vehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h (40 mph). If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function. A sensor is mounted behind the interior rear view mirror. It continuously monitors conditions to alert you of unintentional lane drifting at high speeds. Lane markings may not always be properly tracked by the sensor. Other structures or objects may sometimes be incorrectly detected as a lane marking, resulting in a false or missed warning. The system will automatically detect and track the lane markings on the road. If it detects that the vehicle is unintentionally drifting towards the lane boundaries then a visual warning will be displayed in the information display. There is also a warning given in the form of a vibration felt through the steering wheel. CAUTIONS In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray and large contrasts in lighting can all influence the sensor. The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. USING LANE DEPARTURE WARNING The system may not operate in areas during roadworks construction. Switching the system on and off The system may not operate on roads with sharp bends or narrow lanes. Note: When the system is switched off, a warning indicator will remain illuminated in the information display. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). Do not carry out windscreen repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor. Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged during ignition cycles. If your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us, the system may not function correctly. Note: Keep the windscreen free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice. 191 Lane Departure Warning The lane markings are colour coded as follows: • Green - The system is ready to warn you of any unintentional lane departure. • Red - The vehicle is approaching or is too close to the detected lane boundary. Take immediate safe action to reposition the vehicle. • Grey - The relevant lane boundary will be suppressed. A B E131360 A System on B System off Instances where a lane boundary may be suppressed: • Lane markings on the road may not be detected by the sensor. • The direction indicator for that side of the vehicle is on. • During hard acceleration and braking, or if direct steering is applied. • Vehicle speed is outside the operating limits • If there is an ABS or Stability Control (ESP) intervention. • Narrow lane width. Activate the system using the switches on the indicator stalk. Setting the steering wheel vibration level The system has three intensity levels which can be set using the information display. See General Information (page 88). Setting the system sensitivity You can adjust how quickly the system warns you of a dangerous situation. The system has two sensitivity levels which can be set using the information display. See General Information (page 88). If the lane markings turn red or a vibration is felt through the steering wheel you must take immediate and safe action to align the vehicle and correct any unintended lane drift. System warnings E131363 A column of lane markings is displayed either side of the vehicle graphic. 192 Load Carrying GENERAL INFORMATION CAUTIONS Do not allow items to contact the rear windows. WARNINGS Use load securing straps to an approved standard, e.g. DIN. Do not use any abrasive materials to clean the interior of the rear windows. Make sure that you secure all loose items properly. Do not install stickers or labels to the interior of the rear windows. Place luggage and other loads as low and as far forward as possible within the luggage or loadspace. Do not drive with the tailgate or rear door open. Exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum front and rear axle loads for your vehicle. See Vehicle identification (page 264). Heavy loads, when placed in the passenger compartment, should be on folded rear seats as shown. See Rear Seats (page 128). E135657 Fit a dog guard or load net if placing heavy loads behind the front seats in the passenger compartment. 193 Load Carrying LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS Galaxy A B A B C A B C E75393 194 Load Carrying S-MAX C A A B C A B B E75394 B1 Vehicles without third row seats. Raise the carpet to gain access to the anchor points. B2 Vehicles with third row seats 195 Load Carrying SLIDING LOADSPACE FLOOR WARNING Do not slide the loadspace floor rearwards when the vehicle is standing on an incline of 15 degrees or more and facing uphill. CAUTION The maximum permissible weight on the sliding loadspace floor is 200 kilogrammes (441 pounds). E74811 The maximum permissible weight on the end of the sliding loadspace floor when the floor is in the fully extended position (slid outside the luggage compartment) is 120 kilogrammes (265 pounds). To slide it out fully, press the unlocking handle again and pull it out until it engages in the end position. To slide it forwards, press the unlocking handle and push it forwards. Note: You do not have to exert as much pressure on the unlocking handle if you push the loadspace floor forwards slightly when operating it. Storage compartment A storage compartment is located in the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment. To gain access to the storage compartment, lift up the sliding loadspace floor as follows: E74810 Press the unlocking handle and pull the loadspace floor rearwards. It will stop and engage at a midway position. 196 Load Carrying 4. Release the support leg from the clip on the underside of the floor. 5. Insert the end into the square retainer in the left-hand rail (3). 6. Lift the storage compartment cover using the loop. 2 To return the loadspace floor to the normal position: 1 1. Hold the floor with one hand and release the support leg with the other hand. 2. Insert the support leg back into the clip. 3. Lower the floor. 4. Press the unlocking handle and pull the loadspace floor rearwards until it drops into position on the rails. E74812 REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE 3 E72983 Vehicles with a sliding loadspace floor Raise the loadspace floor to gain access to the storage compartment. See Sliding Loadspace Floor (page 196). E74813 1. Press the unlocking handle and pull the loadspace floor rearwards a short way. 2. Lift up the rear of the floor (1). 3. Push the floor forwards until it engages at the front (2). 197 Load Carrying S-MAX A Vehicles without third row seats B A B A B E75395 CARGO NETS Luggage retention net - type 1 E75891 WARNING When the retention net is installed, do not sit in the seats behind it. CAUTION Keep a distance of at least one centimetre (½ inch) between the retention net and the seats in front of it. You can install the net in the following positions: 198 A Behind the front seats B Behind the second row seats Load Carrying Installing the net 1 2 C C E75892 E75893 C Release button 4 3 E75894 199 Load Carrying 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Luggage retention net - type 2 Fold the seatbacks down. See Rear Seats (page 128). If the retention net is folded, press the red release button C on the hinges of the upper and lower bar 1 and unfold it. Push the ends of the upper bar towards each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof A or B. Make sure that the flap for the centre seat belt is situated on the right hand side of the vehicle. Push the bar forwards into the narrow section of the retainers 2. Attach the net to the luggage anchor points 3. See Luggage Anchor Points (page 194). Tighten the belts 4. CAUTIONS Do not exceed the maximum permissible retention net load of 1 kilogram (2 pounds). Do not place large objects in the lower net storage compartments. Make sure that the rods are securely positioned in the trim panels. Remove in the reverse order. If you need to use the centre seat belt: E95920 1. Fold the third row seats flat. See Rear Seats (page 128). 2. Insert one end of each rod into the retainers in the luggage compartment trim panel. 3. Push the other end of each rod toward its centre and insert the rod into the retainer in the opposite trim panel. 5 Note: The upper rod ends can be inserted into either the top or front retainer in the trim panels. E75895 1. Open the flap 5. 2. Route the seat belt through the opening. Note: On S-MAX the lower net incorporates three storage compartments. Make sure that the net is positioned so that the storage compartments face towards the rear. 200 Load Carrying LUGGAGE COVERS ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS WARNING Roof rack Do not place objects on the luggage cover. WARNINGS If you use a roof rack, the fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher and you may experience different driving characteristics. Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions when you are fitting a roof rack. CAUTIONS Do not exceed the maximum permissible roof load of 75 kilogrammes (165 pounds) (including the roof rack). Do not exceed 130 km/h (81 mph). E72969 Pull out the cover and secure it in the retaining points. Check the security of the roof rack as follows: Release it from the retaining points and let it roll back into the case. Clip the retaining hook onto the case. • • • before starting after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles) at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles) intervals. To minimise windnoise when the roof rack is not in use, cross rails should be moved rearwards and placed together. To reduce fuel consumption, cross rails should be removed when not in use. Installing the crossbars WARNINGS Before using the crossbars, check that they are not damaged or deformed and free from foreign matter. E72970 To remove or install the cover, push either end of the case inwards. 201 Load Carrying WARNINGS Make sure that the gaskets are correctly positioned under each crossbar foot. Distribute the load evenly over the loading area and keep the centre of gravity as low as possible. Secure the load well to prevent it from slipping. Never place any loads directly onto the roof surface. E131371 1. Unlock the covers. CAUTION Remove the crossbars before entering an automatic car wash. Note: The gaskets are marked front and rear to aid installation. E131372 2. Pull the cover towards you. Note: The side mounting tracks are designed such that crossbars (for bicycle carriers, ski carriers etc.) from the Ford accessories range can be fitted. Note: Before installing the crossbars, clean the side mounting tracks with water and a sponge. Note: Position the crossbars as shown. A E131373 B Note: Make sure that the cover is fully opened. 3. Lift the cover E98206 A 150 mm (5.9 inches) B 700 mm (27.6 inches) 202 Load Carrying LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES E75002 WARNINGS Do not raise the seatback when a load retaining fixture is installed. E131374 WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 60 kilogrammes (132 pounds) on two load retaining fixtures and 30 kilogrammes (66 pounds) on one. Make sure that the clamping hook is correctly positioned. Note: A force of approximately 100 newtons (23 lbs) is required to close the cover. Check the security of the load retaining fixtures and tighten its fittings as follows: 4. Attach the clamping hook in the position shown and close the cover. • • • E131375 WARNING Make sure that the crossbars are secure. 5. Lock the covers and remove the key. 203 before starting after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles) at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles) intervals. Load Carrying Installing the load retaining fixtures Luggage compartment floor (vehicles with five seats) Seatback E74997 E74999 E74998 204 Load Carrying Installing the luggage anchor points Sliding loadspace floor E75003 E75000 205 Load Carrying 3 3 2 1 E76378 1. Turn the box over. 2. Position the load bracket. 3. Secure the load bracket with four screws. E75001 Installing the load bracket WARNINGS Install the load bracket with the longest section towards the rear of the vehicle. If you install it the wrong way round, it may not hold the box in place in the event of an accident. Do not install the load bracket on a second row seatback. It cannot be installed the right way round in this position. E76379 Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 20 kilogrammes (44 pounds). 4. Slide the captured bolts onto the load retaining fixture. 206 Load Carrying A B E76380 A B A B E75891 5. Position the load bracket onto the folded seatback so that the captured bolts go through the two holes in longest section of the bracket. 6. Secure the load bracket with the two wing nuts. 7. Remove in the reverse order. A Behind the front seats B Behind the second row seats Installing the dog guard DOG GUARD WARNING When the dog guard is installed, do not sit in the seats behind it. D C CAUTION Keep a distance of at least one centimetre (½ inch) between the dog guard and the seats in front of it. E75896 You can install the dog guard in the following positions: 207 C Bar for installing the dog guard behind the front seats D Bar for installing the dog guard behind the second row seats Load Carrying 1 3 E75897 E75898 1. 2. 3. 2 4. 5. 6. 7. E75892 Fold the seatbacks down. See Rear Seats (page 128). Attach the bar (C or D) to the luggage anchor points 1. See Luggage Anchor Points (page 194). Do not tighten the screws. Push the ends of the bar on the grille towards each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof (A or B). Make sure that the flap for the centre seat belt is situated on the right hand side of the vehicle. Push the bar forwards into the narrow section of the retainers 2. Attach the grille to the lower bar with the handwheels 3. Do not tighten the handwheels. Tighten the screws at the luggage anchor points. Tighten the handwheels 3. Remove in the reverse order. If you need to use the centre seat belt: 208 Load Carrying 4 5 6 E75899 1. Loosen the handwheel and remove it 4. 2. Fold down the flap 5. 3. Fix the flap with the handwheel 6. 4. Route the seat belt through the opening. 209 Towing Change down a gear before you reach a steep downhill gradient. TOWING A TRAILER WARNINGS Do not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph). TOW BALL WARNINGS When not in use, always transport the tow ball arm securely fastened in the luggage compartment. The rear tyre pressures must be increased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) above specification. See Technical Specifications (page 261). Take special care when fitting the tow ball arm as the safety of the vehicle and the trailer depends on Do not exceed the maximum gross train weight stated on the vehicle identification plate. See Vehicle identification (page 264). this. Do not use any tools for mounting or dismounting the tow ball arm. Do not modify the trailer coupling. Do not disassemble or repair the tow ball arm. CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight, i.e. vertical weight on the tow ball, of 90 kilogrammes (198 pounds). Note: Not all vehicles are suitable or approved to have tow bars fitted. Check with your dealer first. Place loads as low and central to the axle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you are towing with an unladen vehicle, the load in the trailer should be placed toward the nose, within the maximum nose load, as this gives the best stability. E71328 A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball arm seat are provided underneath the rear bumper. Turn the trailer socket down through 90 degrees until it engages in the end position. The stability of the vehicle to trailer combination is very much dependant on the quality of the trailer. In high altitude regions above 1 000 metres (3 281 feet), the stipulated maximum permitted gross train weight must be reduced by 10% for every additional 1 000 metres (3 281 feet). Steep gradients WARNING The overrun brake on a trailer is not controlled by ABS. 210 Towing Unlocking the tow ball arm mechanism Inserting the tow ball arm 3 1 1 2 E71329 1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlock (2). 2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the handwheel out and turn it clockwise until it clicks (3). 3. The red mark on the handwheel must align with the green mark on the tow ball. 4. Release the handwheel. The tow ball arm is unlocked. 2 E71330 WARNING The tow ball arm may only be inserted when completely unlocked. 1. Pull out the plug. 2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and press it upwards until it engages (1). Do not hold your hand near the handwheel. 3. The green mark on the handwheel must align with the green mark on the tow ball. 4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwise and remove the key (2). 5. Pull the protecting cap from the key bow and press it onto the lock. 211 Towing Driving with a trailer Removing the tow ball arm A 3 B E71331 2 WARNING If any of the below conditions cannot be met, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by a properly trained technician. 1 Before starting your journey, make sure that the tow ball arm is properly locked. Check that: • • • • E71332 1. Unhitch the trailer. 2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the cap into the key bow. Insert the key and unlock (1). 3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the handwheel out, turn it clockwise against the stop (2) and remove the tow ball arm (3). 4. Release the handwheel. the green marks are aligned the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted to the tow ball arm you have removed the key (B) the tow ball arm is securely positioned. It must not move when jerked. When unlocked in this way, the tow ball arm can be reinserted at any time. 212 Towing Driving without a trailer RETRACTABLE TOW BALL CAUTION Only move the tow ball arm with your hand. Never use your foot or auxiliary tools as damage to the mechanism may result. 1 A E94771 1. Remove the tow ball arm. 2. Insert the plug into its seat (1). WARNING Never unlock the tow ball arm with the trailer attached. Maintenance E75173 WARNING You can turn the retractable tow ball arm through 90 degrees using the handwheel A. Remove the tow ball arm and protect the seat with the plug before steam cleaning your vehicle. Keep the system clean. Periodically lubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, and locking balls with resin-free grease or oil and the lock with graphite. C B In case of loss, replacement keys are available from the manufacturer by stating the number on the lock cylinder. E75174 213 Towing A 13-pin trailer socket B is provided underneath the rear bumper next to the tow ball arm C. E75175 D E76040 Note: When not in use, insert the key into the storage position D to the right of the handwheel. Swivelling the tow ball in WARNINGS Keep your hands away from the handwheel as it rotates during the locking process. E75176 1. Insert the key into the handwheel and turn it clockwise to unlock. 2. Pull the handwheel out and turn it anti-clockwise to the stop. The tow ball arm automatically swivels into a midway position. 3. Release the handwheel. The tow ball arm is not locked. This is indicated by the warning tone and the handwheel projects about five millimetres (0.2 inch) from its housing. You will hear a warning tone when the tow ball arm is not in one of the locked positions. If you do not hear the tone when moving the tow ball arm, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by a properly trained technician. CAUTION Before retracting the ball neck into its stowage position always unhitch the trailer or dismantle load carriers and their attachments. Dismantle attachments for tracking stabilisation. Remove the plug for the trailer power supply and the adapter from the socket. Failure to do so may result in damage to the bumper. 214 Towing 4. Manually turn the tow ball arm steadily from its midway position to the stop in the stowage position. The tow ball arm automatically locks in the end position. The locking process is clearly audible if the level of background noise is not too high. When the locking process is completed, the warning tone stops and the handwheel will return to its original position. 5. Turn the key anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert the key into the storage position. E75179 E75178 1. Insert the key into the handwheel and turn it clockwise to unlock. 2. Pull the handwheel out and turn it anti-clockwise to the stop. The tow ball arm automatically swivels into the midway position. 3. Release the handwheel. The tow ball arm is not locked. This is indicated by the warning tone and the handwheel projects about five millimetres (0.2 inch) from its housing. E75177 Swivelling the tow ball out WARNING You will hear a warning tone when the tow ball arm is not in one of the locked positions. If you do not hear the tone when moving the tow ball arm, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by a properly trained technician. 215 Towing 4. Manually turn the tow ball arm steadily from its midway position to the stop in the operating position. The tow ball arm automatically locks in the end position. The locking process is clearly audible if the level of background noise is not too high. When the locking process is completed, the warning tone stops and the handwheel will return to its original position. 5. Turn the key anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert the key into the storage position. CAUTIONS When cleaning the vehicle with a steam jet do not direct the high pressure jet directly onto the swivel joint of the tow ball arm. Driving with a trailer WARNING If any of the conditions below cannot be met, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by a properly trained technician. Before starting your journey, make sure that the tow ball arm is properly locked. Check that: • • • • there is no warning tone when the locking procedure has been completed the handwheel is in its housing and that there is no gap you have locked the handwheel (anti-clockwise) and removed the key the tow ball arm is locked. It must not move when jerked. Maintenance CAUTIONS The towing hitch and control unit are maintenance-free. Do not grease or oil them. Only the manufacturer should carry out repairs or dismantle the towing hitch. 216 Driving Hints In an emergency, the vehicle can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 200 millimetres (8 inches) and at a maximum speed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Extra caution should be exercised when driving through flowing water. RUNNING-IN Tyres WARNING New tyres need to be run-in for approximately 500 kilometres (300 miles). During this time, you may experience different driving characteristics. When driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the vehicle. After driving through water, and as soon as it is safe to do so: • Depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. • Check that the horn works. • Check that the vehicle's lights are fully operational. • Check the power assistance of the steering system. Brakes and clutch WARNING Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch if possible for the first 150 kilometres (100 miles) in town and for the first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles) on motorways. Engine CAUTION Avoid driving too fast during the first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labour the engine. COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS The functional operation of some components and systems can be affected at temperatures below -30°C (-22°F). DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water CAUTIONS Drive through water in an emergency only, and not as part of normal driving. Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. 217 Roadside Emergencies FIRST AID KIT E73238 Space is provided in the under floor storage compartment to store a first aid kit. See Storage compartments (page 139). WARNING TRIANGLE E73239 Space is provided in the under floor storage compartment to store a warning triangle. See Storage compartments (page 139). 218 Fuses FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Engine compartment fuse box E72590 2. Remove the cover. E72588 3. Turn the knob through 90 degrees and release the fuse box from the retaining bracket. Central fuse box 4. Lower the fuse box cover and pull it towards you. All vehicles 5. Install in the reverse order. Rear fuse box E72589 1. Pinch the retaining clips to release the cover. E72591 Release the catches and remove the cover. 219 Fuses CHANGING A FUSE CAUTION Fit a replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have removed. WARNINGS Do not modify the electrical system of your vehicle in any way. Have repairs to the electrical system and the replacement of relays and high current fuses carried out by a properly trained technician. Note: You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. Note: All fuses, except high current fuses, are a push fit. Note: A fuse puller is located in the engine compartment fuse box. Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment off before touching or attempting to change a fuse. 220 Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Engine compartment fuse box E75525 Fuse Ampere rating F1 10 Transmission control module (AWF21) Circuits protected F1 15 Transmission control module (MPS6) F2 5 Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines) 221 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected F2 5 Vaporiser glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F3 70 F3 1 Engine cooling fan - twin fan (2.3L Duratec-HE and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi automatic) 80 1 Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L DuratorqTDCi Stage V and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F4 60 Glow plugs F5 60 Engine cooling fan (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L DuratorqTDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi manual, 2.0L Duratec-HE, 2.3L Duratec-HE and 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi) F5 70 Engine cooling fan - twin fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi) F6 7.5 HEGO sensor (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi) F6 10 HEGO sensor, CMS Sensor, Oxygen Sensor (engine management) F6 20 Vaporiser glow plug (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F7 5 Relay coils F8 10 Powertrain control module, fuel metering unit, MAF sensor, fuel rail pressure control valve (engine management) F8 20 Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F8 15 Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F9 10 MAF Sensor, Fuel Injectors (engine management) F9 5 Fuel pump vaporiser (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F9 7.5 MAF Sensor, EGR bypass Valve , Fuel pump vaporiser (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (engine management) F9 7.5 Degas valve, TMAF sensor, active grille shutter, bypass valve, relay coil, auxiliary run on water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi) 222 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected F10 10 Engine control module (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi) F10 7.5 Auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi) F11 10 PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, Sonic Purge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve, EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine management). T.MAF sensor, variable exhaust timing valve, active grille shutter, cannister purge valve. turbo control valve, wastegate valve (engine management). F11 10 Turbo control valve, MAF sensor, active grille shutter, EGR valve, VCV valve (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi) F11 5 MAF sensor, water in fuel sensor, active grille shutter, inlet metering valve (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F11 7.5 Fuel rail pressure, fuel metering unit, active grille shutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F11 10 Turbo control valve, variable intake timing valve, variable exhaust timing valve, cannister purge valve, electrical bypass valve (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi) F12 10 Coil on Plug; Canister Purge Valve, Power Steering Pressure Switch (engine management) F12 10 EGR throttle, variable turbo control (2.0L DuratorqTDCi) F12 5 Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi) F12 15 Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi) F13 15 Air conditioning F14 15 Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L DuratorqTDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi) F14 10 HEGO sensors (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F15 40 Starter relay F16 80 Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC) F17 60 Central fuse box supply A F18 60 Central fuse box supply B 223 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected F19 60 Rear fuse box supply C F20 60 Rear fuse box supply D F21 30 VQM/non VQM: Cluster/Audio/AC/FLR F22 30 Windscreen wiper module F23 25 Heated rear window F24 30 Headlamp washer F25 30 ABS valves F26 40 ABS pump F27 25 Fuel fired heater F28 40 Heater blower F29 – Not used F30 5 ABS 30 feed F31 15 Horn F32 5 Fuel fired heater - remote control F33 5 Light switch module, engine compartment fuse box coils F34 40 Heated windscreen (left-hand side) F35 40 Heated windscreen (right-hand side) F36 15 Rear wiper 15 feed F37 7.5 Heated front washer jets/FLR + FSM KL15 F38 10 PCM/TCM/EHPAS 15 feed F39 15 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) F40 5 Headlamp levelling/AFS module F41 20 F42 5 Cluster IP F43 15 Audio/BVC module/DAB module Instrument panel 224 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected F44 5 Automatic AC/Manual AC F45 5 FLR (Start Stop) 1 Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed. Central fuse box A B E124888 A Left-hand drive B Right-hand drive 225 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected F1 7.5 F2 5 Cluster F3 10 Interior lamps F4 5 Engine immobiliser F5 7.5 F6 5 Rain sensor F7 20 Cigar lighter F8 10 Fuel filler flap unlock supply F9 15 Windscreen washers - rear F10 15 Windscreen washers - front F11 10 Luggage compartment release supply Steering wheel module Adaptive cruise control (ACC) F12 10 Fuel filler flap lock supply F13 20 Fuel pump F13 7.5 Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) F14 5 Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor F15 5 Ignition switch F16 5 Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II (board computer diagnostics) F17 5 Steering wheel vibration actuator F18 10 SRS (airbag) supply F19 7.5 ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake (EPB), accelerator pedal supply F20 7.5 Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimming mirror, lane departure warning F21 15 Radio supply 226 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating F22 5 F23 20 F24 5 Circuits protected Brake lamp switch Sunroof Climate Control Module and Steering Column Unit supply Rear fuse box E75526 227 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected FA1 25 Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down, central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror) FA2 25 Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down, central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror) FA3 25 Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down) FA4 25 Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down) FA5 10 Rear locking (without rear door modules) FA6 15 Auxiliary power socket FA7 5 Relay coils FA8 20 FA9 5 Relay coils VQM (Start Stop) FA10 - Not used FA11 20 Accessories, trailer module FA12 30 Electric driver's seat FB1 15 Sunblind system Keyless vehicle module FB2 15 Suspension module FB3 15 Heated driver's seat FB4 15 Heated front passenger seat FB5 – Not used FB6 10 Rear climate control FB7 – Not used FB8 5 Parking aid, BLIS FB9 30 Electric front passenger seat FB10 10 Anti-theft alarm horn FB11 – Not used FB12 – Not used FC1 7.5 Electric rear quarter windows 228 Fuses Fuse Ampere rating Circuits protected FC2 30 Electric parking brake (EPB) FC3 30 Electric parking brake (EPB) FC4 10 Rear air conditioning FC5 20 Keyless vehicle FC6 20 Rear air conditioning blower FC7 5 FC8 7.5 Rear seat entertainment/CD Changer Seat memory function module FC9 20 Audio amplifier FC10 10 Sony audiophile FC11 – Not used FC12 – Not used 229 Vehicle recovery Front towing eye TOWING POINTS Towing eye location E73241 Rear towing eye E73240 The screw-in towing eye is located in the underfloor storage compartment behind the front seats. See Storage compartments (page 139). A The towing eye must always be carried in the vehicle. E73242 Installing the towing eye A CAUTION Mount for rear towing eye The screw-in towing eye has a left-hand thread. Turn it anti-clockwise to install it. Make sure that the towing eye is fully tightened. Insert a suitable object into the hole on the underside of the cover and prise off the cover. Note: On vehicles with a tow bar, the towing eye cannot be installed at the rear of the vehicle. Use the tow bar to tow a vehicle. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Install the towing eye. All vehicles WARNINGS Switch the ignition on when your vehicle is being towed. The steering lock will engage and the direction indicators and brake lamps will not work if you do not. 230 Vehicle recovery Vehicles with 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel (Stage V) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4) and 6-Speed Automatic Transmission WARNINGS The brake servo and the power steering pump do not operate unless the engine is running. Press the brake pedal harder and allow for increased stopping distances and heavier steering. CAUTIONS It is recommended not to tow with the drive wheels on the ground. However, if it is required to move the vehicle from a dangerous location, do not tow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h (12 mph) or further than 20 kilometres (12 miles). CAUTIONS Too much tension in the tow rope could cause damage to your vehicle or the vehicle that is towing. Do not use a rigid tow bar on the front towing eye. If a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) and a distance of 20 kilometres (12 miles) is to be exceeded the drive wheels must be lifted clear of the ground. Drive off slowly and smoothly without jerking the vehicle that is towing. Do not tow your vehicle if the ambient temperature is below 0ºC (32ºF). Vehicles with automatic transmission, except 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel (Stage V) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4) with 6-Speed Automatic Transmission Do not tow your vehicle backwards. In the event of a mechanical failure of the transmission the drive wheels must be lifted clear of the ground. Select neutral when your vehicle is being towed. CAUTIONS Do not tow your vehicle faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) or further than 50 kilometres (30 miles). If a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) and a distance of 50 kilometres (30 miles) is to be exceeded the drive wheels must be lifted clear of the ground. In the event of a mechanical failure of the transmission the drive wheels must be lifted clear of the ground. Do not tow your vehicle backwards. Select neutral when your vehicle is being towed. 231 Maintenance Check when refuelling GENERAL INFORMATION • Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of Ford Authorised Repairers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialised tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. • • • • In addition to regular servicing, we recommend that you carry out the following additional checks. Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 243). Brake fluid level. See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). Tyre pressures (when cold). See Technical Specifications (page 261). Tyre condition. See Tyre Care (page 259). Monthly checks • WARNINGS Switch the ignition off before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. • • • • • • Do not touch the electronic ignition system parts after you have switched the ignition on or when the engine is running. The system operates at high voltage. Keep your hands and clothing clear of the engine cooling fan. Under certain conditions, the fan may continue to run for several minutes after you have switched the engine off. Engine coolant level (engine cold). See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks. Power steering fluid level. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). Air conditioning operation. Parking brake operation. Horn operation. Tightness of wheel nuts. See Technical Specifications (page 261). OPENING AND CLOSING THE BONNET Opening the bonnet CAUTION When carrying out maintenance checks, make sure that filler caps are fitted securely. Daily checks • • • Exterior lamps. Interior lamps. Warning lamps and indicators. E73698 232 Maintenance E87785 Raise the bonnet slightly and move the catch towards the left-hand side of the vehicle. E87786 Open the bonnet and support it with the strut. Closing the bonnet WARNING Make sure that the bonnet is closed properly. Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop from under its own weight for the last 20 – 30 centimetres (8 - 11 inches). 233 Maintenance UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA) B A J I D C H G E F E132430 A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 219). 1 F Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). H Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). 1 234 Maintenance 1 I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4) B A J I H D C G E F E73231 A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 221). 1 F Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). H Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). 1 235 Maintenance 1 I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4) A E124921 J I B C H D G E F A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 221). 1 F Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). H Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). 1 236 Maintenance 1 I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4) B A J I H D C G E F E81313 A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 221). F Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). H Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). 1 1 237 Maintenance 1 I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL A E135199 J I B C H D G E F A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 219). F Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). 1 238 Maintenance 1 1 H Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL B A J I H E73234 239 D C G E F Maintenance A J B I C H D G E F E124913 1 A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 221). 1 F Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). H Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 243). I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). 1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. 240 Maintenance UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL B A J I H D C G E F E87715 1 A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). B Engine oil filler cap : See Engine Oil Check (page 243). C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 244). D Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 250). E Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 219). 1 F Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary. G Screen washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 245). H Engine oil dipstick : See Engine Oil Check (page 243). I Power steering fluid reservoir: See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 244). J Engine coolant reservoir: See Engine Coolant Check (page 243). 1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification. 241 Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4) ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA) A B A B E124917 A E134114 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4) A E134040 B MIN B MAX A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL/2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL/2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL E92036 A B A E95543 242 A MIN B MAX B Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHECK WARNING Do not top up further than the MAX mark. CAUTION Do not use oil additives or other engine treatments. Under certain conditions, they could damage the engine. Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. Top up with fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 245). Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 5000 kilometres (3000 miles). Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance. Checking the oil level ENGINE COOLANT CHECK CAUTION Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. Checking the coolant level WARNING Note: Check the level before starting the engine. Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your doctor. Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Note: Oil expands when it is hot. The level may therefore extend a few millimetres beyond the MAX mark. CAUTION Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. If the level is at the MIN mark, top up immediately. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may therefore extend beyond the MAX mark. Topping up If the level is at the MIN mark, top up immediately. WARNINGS Only top up when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down. Topping up WARNINGS Only top up when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down. Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Remove the filler cap. 243 Maintenance WARNINGS Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is hot. Wait for the engine to cool down. WARNINGS If the level is at the MIN mark, have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Undiluted coolant is flammable and may ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust. Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. CAUTIONS In an emergency, you can add just water to the cooling system to reach a vehicle service station. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. Note: The brake and the clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir. Top up with fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 245). Prolonged use of incorrect dilution of the coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape slowly as you unscrew the cap. WARNING CAUTION Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your doctor. Do not top up further than the MAX mark. Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water using fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 245). CAUTION Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK If the level is at the MIN mark, top up immediately. Topping up WARNINGS Use of any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid may reduce brake efficiency and not meet Ford's performance standards. Remove the filler cap. CAUTION Do not top up further than the MAX mark. Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your doctor. Top up with fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 245). 244 Maintenance When topping up, use a mixture of washer fluid and water to help prevent freezing in cold weather and improve the cleaning capability. We recommend that you use only high quality washer fluid. WASHER FLUID CHECK Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir. For information on fluid dilution, refer to the product instructions. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle fluids Note: Use fluids which meet the specifications or requirements defined. Use of other fluids may lead to damage which is not covered by your Warranty. Specification Viscosity Grade Recommended fluid Engine oil - petrol engines only WSS-M2C948-B 5W-20 Castrol or Ford Engine Oil Alternative engine oil - all petrol engines WSS-M2C913-C 5W-30 Castrol or Ford Engine Oil Engine oil - diesel engines WSS-M2C913-C 5W-30 Castrol or Ford Engine Oil Antifreeze WSS-M97B44-D - Motorcraft SuperPlus Antifreeze Brake fluid WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO 4925 Class 6 - Motorcraft or Ford DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid WSS-M2C204-A2 - Ford Power Steering Fluid Item Power steering fluid Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine. Topping up the oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined by WSS-M2C913-C or WSS-M2C948-B (petrol engines only), you must use SAE 5W-30 that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5. Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels. Castrol engine oil recommended. 245 Maintenance E115472 Capacities Variant Item Capacity in Litres (gallons) All Power steering system MAX mark All Windscreen and rear window washer system 3.9 (0.9) All Fuel tank 70 (15.4) 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma) Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 4.1 (0.9) 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma) Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 3.8 (0.8) 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma) Engine cooling system 6.5 (1.4) 2.0L Duratec-HE Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 4.3 (1.0) 2.0L Duratec-HE Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 3.9 (0.9) 2.0L Duratec-HE Engine cooling system 6.2 (1.4) 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 5.4 (1.2) 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 5.1 (1.1) 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi Engine cooling system 2.3L Duratec-HE Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 4.3 (1.0) 2.3L Duratec-HE Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 3.9 (0.9) 2.3L Duratec-HE Engine cooling system 6.9 (1.5) 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 3.8 (0.8) 246 approx. 6.9 (1.5) Maintenance Variant Item Capacity in Litres (gallons) 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 3.5 (0.8) 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Engine cooling system 7.3 (1.6) 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 5.5 (1.2) 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 5 (1.1) 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Engine cooling system 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system including the oil filter 6 (1.3) 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter 5.4 (1.2) 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine cooling system 8.4 (1.9) 247 8.1 (1.8) Vehicle Care Cleaning the chrome trim CLEANING THE EXTERIOR CAUTION WARNING Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents. Use soapy water. If you use a car wash with a waxing cycle, make sure that you remove the wax from the windscreen. Cleaning the alloy wheels CAUTIONS Prior to using a car wash facility check the suitability of it for your vehicle. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers. Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period time. Some car wash installations use water at high pressure. This could damage certain parts of your vehicle. Remove the aerial before using an automatic car wash. Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. Switch the heater blower off to prevent contamination of the fresh air filter. Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. We recommend that you wash your vehicle with a sponge and lukewarm water containing a car shampoo. Cleaning the headlamps Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers. CAUTIONS Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you: Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry. • Cleaning the rear window • CAUTION Do not scrape the inside of the rear window or use abrasives or chemical solvents to clean it. • Clean them weekly with the recommended wheel and tyre cleaner. Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse them thoroughly with a pressurised stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process. We recommend that you use Ford service wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp chamois leather to clean the inside of the rear window. 248 Vehicle Care Rear windows Using other non-recommended cleaning products can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. CAUTIONS Do not use any abrasive materials to clean the interior of the rear windows. Body paintwork preservation Do not install stickers or labels to the interior of the rear windows. CAUTIONS Do not polish your vehicle in strong sunshine. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Do not allow polish to touch plastic surfaces. It could be difficult to remove. CAUTION Do not apply polish to the windscreen or rear window. This could cause the wipers to become noisy and they may not clear the window properly. Remove apparently harmless looking substances from the paintwork immediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree resins, insect remains, tar spots, road salt and industrial fall out). We recommend that you wax the paintwork once or twice a year. You should repair paintwork damage caused by stones from the road or minor scratches as soon as possible. A choice of products is available from your Ford Dealer. Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. CLEANING THE INTERIOR Seat belts WARNINGS Do not use abrasives, or chemical solvents to clean them. Do not allow moisture to penetrate the seat belt retractor mechanism. Clean the seat belts with interior cleaner or water applied with a soft sponge. Let the seat belts dry naturally, away from artificial heat. Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens, radio screens WARNING Do not use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. 249 Vehicle battery To connect the booster cables JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNING Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. A CAUTIONS Connect batteries with only the same nominal voltage. Always use booster cables with insulated clamps and adequate size cable. C D Do not disconnect the battery from the vehicle’s electrical system. B E102925 1. A Flat battery vehicle B Booster battery vehicle C Positive connection cable D Negative connection cable Position the vehicles so that they do not touch one another. 2. Switch off the engine and any electrical equipment. 3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal of vehicle A (cable C). 4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of vehicle B to the ground connection of vehicle A (cable D). See Battery connection points (page 251). 250 Vehicle battery BATTERY CONNECTION POINTS CAUTIONS Do not connect to the negative (–) terminal of the flat battery. Make sure that the cables are clear of any moving parts and fuel delivery system parts. To start the engine 1. Run the engine of vehicle B at moderately high speed. 2. Start the engine of vehicle A. 3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of three minutes before disconnecting the cables. CAUTION E114494 Do not switch on the headlamps when disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage could blow the bulbs. CAUTION Do not connect to the negative (–) terminal of the flat battery. Disconnect the cables in the reverse order. CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY CAUTION For vehicles with Start-stop the battery requirement is different. It must be replaced by one of exactly the same specification as the original. Note: Where applicable, the audio system must be reprogrammed with the keycode. The battery is located in the engine compartment. See Maintenance (page 232). 251 Wheels and Tyres Jacking and lifting points GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING CAUTIONS Use only approved wheel and tyre sizes. Using other sizes could damage the vehicle and will make the National Type Approval invalid. Never place anything between the jack and the ground, or the jack and the vehicle. CAUTION If you change the diameter of the tyres from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take the vehicle to your dealer to have the engine management system reprogrammed. Use only the specified jacking points. If you use other positions, you may damage the body, steering, suspension, engine, braking system or the fuel lines. If you intend to change the size of the wheels from that fitted at the factory, check the suitability with your dealer. Note: Use a jack with a minimum lifting capacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate with a minimum diameter of 80 millimetres (3.1 inches). Note: Check your tyre pressures regularly to optimise fuel economy. A decal with tyre pressure data is located in the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar. Check and set the tyre pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive the vehicle and when the tyres are cold. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL Locking wheel nuts You can obtain a replacement locking wheel nut key and replacement locking wheel nuts from your dealer using the reference number certificate. Vehicle jack A Your vehicle is not equipped with a vehicle jack or a wheel brace. It is recommended to use a workshop type hydraulic jack for changing between summer and winter tyres. E90708 252 Wheels and Tyres Indentations in the sills A show the location of the jacking points. WARNINGS Make sure that the vehicle is on firm, level ground with the wheels pointing straight ahead. Switch off the ignition and apply the parking brake. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, select first or reverse gear. If it has an automatic transmission, select park. Have the passengers leave the vehicle. Secure the diagonally opposite wheel with an appropriate block or wheel chock. E93020 Make sure that the arrows on directional tyres point in the direction of rotation when the vehicle is moving forwards. If you have to fit a spare wheel with the arrows pointing in the opposite direction, have the tyre refitted in the correct direction by a properly trained technician. Vehicles with side skirts Do not work underneath the vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. Make sure that the jack is vertical to the jacking point and the base is flat on the ground. CAUTION E90709 Do not lay alloy wheels face down on the ground, this will damage the paint. Place the lifting plate through the cut out on the underside of the skirt. 1. Removing a road wheel WARNINGS Park your vehicle in such a position that neither the traffic nor you are hindered or endangered. Set up a warning triangle. 253 Remove the hub cap or cover. Wheels and Tyres Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels and spoked steel wheels can also be used for the steel spare wheel for a short time (maximum two weeks). Note: You can use wheel nuts designed for use with alloy wheels with steel wheels. Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact surfaces are free from foreign matter. Note: Make sure that the cones on the wheel nuts are against the wheel. 1. Install the wheel. 2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight. E71948 2. Install the locking wheel nut key. 3. Slacken the wheel nuts. 4. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre is clear of the ground. 5. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel. Installing a road wheel WARNINGS Use only approved wheel and tyre sizes. Using other sizes could damage the vehicle and will make the National Type Approval invalid. See Technical Specifications (page 261). E71948 3. Install the locking wheel nut key. Do not fit run flat tyres on vehicles that were not originally fitted with them. Please contact your dealer for more details regarding compatibility. CAUTION Do not install alloy wheels using wheel nuts designed for use with steel wheels. 254 Wheels and Tyres General information WARNINGS Depending on the type and extent of tyre damage, some tyres can only be partially sealed or not sealed at all. Loss of tyre pressure can affect vehicle handling, leading to loss of vehicle control. 1 4 3 Do not use the tyre repair kit if the tyre has already been damaged as a result of being driven under inflated. 5 2 Do not use the tyre repair kit on run flat tyres. E75442 Do not try to seal damage other than that located within the visible tread of the tyre. 4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in the sequence shown. 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. 6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the sequence shown. See Technical Specifications (page 261). 7. Install the hub cap or cover using the ball of your hand. Do not try to seal damage to the tyre’s sidewall. The tyre repair kit seals most tyre punctures [with a diameter of up to six millimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarily restore mobility. WARNING Observe the following rules when using the kit: Have the wheel nuts checked for tightness and the tyre pressure checked as soon as possible. • TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tyre, but does include an emergency tyre repair kit that can be used to repair one flat tyre. • The tyre repair kit is located in the underfloor storage compartment. See Storage compartments (page 139). • Note: Remove the underfloor storage compartment screws if fitted. • • 255 Drive with caution and avoid making sudden steering or driving manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or you are towing a trailer. The kit will provide you with an emergency temporary repair, enabling you to continue your journey to the next vehicle or tyre dealer, or to drive a maximum distance of 200 kilometres (125 miles). Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Keep the kit out of the reach of children. Only use the kit when the ambient temperature is between –30°C (-22°F) and +70°C (+158°F). Wheels and Tyres Using the tyre repair kit Inflating the tyre WARNINGS Compressed air can act as an explosive or propellant. WARNINGS Check the sidewall of the tyre prior to inflation. If there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage, do not attempt to inflate the tyre. Never leave the tyre repair kit unattended while in use. Do not stand directly beside the tyre while the compressor is pumping. CAUTION Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If any cracks, bumps or similar damage appear, turn off the compressor and let the air out by means of the pressure relief valve B. Do not continue driving with this tyre. Do not keep the compressor operating for more than 10 minutes. Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for the vehicle with which it was supplied. • • • • • • The sealant contains natural rubber latex. Avoid contact with skin and clothing. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your doctor. Park your vehicle at the roadside so that you do not obstruct the flow of traffic and so that you are able to use the kit without being in danger. Apply the parking brake, even if you have parked on a level road, to make sure that the vehicle will not move. Do not attempt to remove foreign objects like nails or screws penetrating the tyre. Leave the engine running while the kit is in use, but not if the vehicle is in an enclosed or poorly ventilated area (for example, inside a building). In these circumstances, switch the compressor on with the engine turned off. Replace the sealant bottle with a new one before the expiry date (see top of bottle) is reached. Inform all other users of the vehicle that the tyre has been temporarily sealed with the tyre repair kit and make them aware of the special driving conditions to be observed. If the tyre inflation pressure does not reach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within seven minutes, the tyre may have suffered excessive damage, making a temporary repair impossible. In this case, do not continue driving with this tyre. CAUTION Screwing the bottle onto the bottle holder will pierce the seal of the bottle. Do not unscrew the bottle from the holder as the sealant will escape. 256 Wheels and Tyres 1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit. 2. Peel off the label I showing the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) from the casing and attach it to the instrument panel in the driver’s field of view. Make sure the label does not obscure anything important. 3. Take the hose C and the power plug with cable G out of the kit. 4. Unscrew the orange cap D and the bottle lid J. 5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwise into the bottle holder E fully tight. 6. Remove the valve cap from the damaged tyre. 7. Detach the protective cap A from the hose C and screw the hose C firmly onto the valve of the damaged tyre. 8. Make sure that the compressor switch H is in position 0. 9. Insert the power plug G into the cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power socket. See Cigar Lighter (page 137). See Auxiliary Power Points (page 137). 10. Start the engine. 11. Move the compressor switch H to position 1. 12. Inflate the tyre for no longer than seven minutes to an inflation pressure of minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and a maximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Move the compressor switch H to position 0 and check the current tyre pressure with pressure gauge F. 13. Remove the power plug G from the cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power socket. 14. Quickly unscrew the hose C from the tyre valve and replace the protective cap A. Fasten the valve cap again. 15. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottle holder E. A K B J I H C D E94973 G F A Protective cap B Pressure relief valve C Hose D Orange cap E Bottle holder F Pressure gauge G Power plug with cable H Compressor switch I Label J Bottle lid K Sealant bottle E 257 Wheels and Tyres 16. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid and the orange cap are stored safely, but still easily accessible in the vehicle. The kit will be required again when you check the tyre pressure. 17. Immediately drive approximately three kilometres (two miles) so that the sealant can seal the damaged area. Note: When pumping in the sealant through the tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to 6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about 30 seconds. 6. Once you have inflated the tyre to its correct tyre pressure, move the compressor switch H to position 0, remove the power plug G from the socket, unscrew the hose C, fasten the valve cap and replace the protective cap A. 7. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottle holder E and store the kit away safely in its original location. 8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist to get the damaged tyre replaced. Before the tyre is removed from the rim, inform your tyre dealer that the tyre contains sealant. Renew the kit as soon as possible after it has been used once. Note: Remember that emergency roadside tyre repair kits only provide temporary mobility. Regulations concerning tyre repair after usage of tyre repair kit may differ from country to country. You should consult a tyre specialist for advice. WARNING If you experience heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behaviour or noises while driving, reduce your speed and drive with caution to a place where it is safe for you to stop the vehicle. Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If the tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi) or if there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage visible, do not continue driving with this tyre. WARNING Before driving, make sure the tyre is adjusted to the recommended inflation pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). Monitor the tyre pressure until the sealed tyre is replaced. Checking the tyre pressure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stop the vehicle after driving approximately three kilometres (two miles). Check, and where necessary, adjust the pressure of the damaged tyre. Attach the kit and read the tyre pressure from the pressure gauge F. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyre is 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it to the specified pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). Follow the inflation procedure once again to top up the tyre. Check the tyre pressure again from the pressure gauge F. If the tyre pressure is too high, deflate the tyre to the specified pressure using the pressure relief valve B. Empty sealant bottles can be disposed of together with normal household waste. Return remains of sealant to your dealer or dispose of it in compliance with local waste disposal regulations. 258 Wheels and Tyres TYRE CARE USING SNOW CHAINS WARNINGS Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). Do not use snow chains on snow-free roads. Only fit snow chains to specified tyres. See Technical Specifications (page 261). E70415 CAUTION To make sure the front and rear tyres of your vehicle wear evenly and last longer, we recommend that you swap the tyres from front to rear and vice versa at regular intervals of between 5000 and 10000 kilometres (3000 and 6000 miles). If your vehicle is fitted with wheel trims, remove them before fitting snow chains. Note: The ABS will continue to operate normally. CAUTION Do not scrub the sidewalls of the tyres when you are parking. Only use small link snow chains. Only use snow chains on the front wheels. Vehicles with stability control (ESP) If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowly and approach it with the wheels at right-angles to the kerb. Vehicles with stability control (ESP) may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics which can be reduced by switching traction control off. See Using Stability Control (page 169). Examine the tyres regularly for cuts, foreign objects and uneven wear of the tread. Uneven wear could mean that the wheel alignment is outside specification. Check the tyre pressures (including the spare) when cold, every two weeks. TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM USING WINTER TYRES WARNINGS The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to regularly check the tyre pressures. CAUTION Make sure that you use the correct wheel nuts for the type of wheel the winter tyres are fitted to. The system will only provide a low tyre pressure warning. It will not inflate the tyres. If winter tyres are used, make sure that the tyre pressures are correct. See Technical Specifications (page 261). 259 Wheels and Tyres Checking the tyre pressures WARNINGS The system may take longer to detect low pressure in the tyres if you have fitted snow chains. Note: If the tyre pressures are greater than or equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²), you will see the + symbol below the pressure value. The system only measures pressure up to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²). The + symbol indicates that the tyre pressures may be higher. Do not drive on significantly under-inflated tyres. This may cause the tyres to overheat and fail. Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may also affect your ability to drive the vehicle safely. Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have a slightly different menu structure. Select Settings first to access Information. Do not bend or damage the valves when you are inflating the tyres. 1. Have tyres installed by properly trained technicians. 2. Note: After changing the tyres or sensors the system will take a few minutes to reset. During this period the system is operational but a warning lamp may appear. 3. 4. Note: If you fit tyres that do not have monitoring sensors, a message will be shown in the display. See Information Messages (page 101). Confirm this message to deactivate the system. 5. The system monitors the pressure in the tyres using sensors located on the wheels and a receiver located in your vehicle. When the system detects low pressure in the tyres, a warning message is displayed in the information display. See Information Messages (page 101). Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. Highlight Information with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. Setting the vehicle load Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have a slightly different menu structure. Select Settings first to access Setup. Correct tyre pressure settings depend on vehicle load. See Technical Specifications (page 261). The system can only detect low pressure if you have entered the current vehicle load. If a low pressure warning message is displayed in the information display, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible and inflate them to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 261). If this happens frequently, have the cause determined and rectified as soon as possible. 1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu. 2. Highlight Setup with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button. 3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button. 260 Wheels and Tyres 4. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. 5. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel nut torque Wheel type Nm (Ib-ft) All 170 (125) 261 Wheels and Tyres Tyre pressures (cold tyres) Up to 160 km/h (100 mph) Normal load Rear Front Rear bar (lbf/ in²) bar (lbf/ in²) bar (lbf/ in²) bar (lbf/ in²) 2.4 (35) 2.4 (35) 2.6 (38) 3.1 (45) 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4), 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) 225/50 R 17 and 235/45 R 18 Diesel Stage V, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) 2.4 (35) 2.2 (32) 2.6 (38) 3.1 (45) 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4) 215/60 R 16 2.2 (32) 2.4 (35) 2.6 (38) 3.1 (45) 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4) 225/50 R 17 and 235/45 R 18 2.2 (32) 2.2 (32) 2.6 (38) 3.1 (45) Variant 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4), 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) * Full load Front Tyre size * 215/60 R 16 * Only fit snow chains to specified tyres. 262 Wheels and Tyres Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100 mph) Normal load Full load Front Rear Front Rear bar (lbf/ in²) bar (lbf/ in²) bar (lbf/ in²) bar (lbf/ in²) 2.5 (36) 2.4 (35) 2.7 (39) 3.1 (45) 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) 225/50 R 17 and 235/45 R 18 Diesel Stage V and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) 2.5 (36) 2.3 (33) 2.7 (39) 3.1 (45) 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4) 215/60 R 16 2.4 (35) 2.4 (35) 2.6 (38) 3.1 (45) 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4) 225/50 R 17 and 235/45 R 18 2.4 (35) 2.2 (32) 2.6 (38) 3.1 (45) 215/60 R 16 2.6 (38) 2.6 (38) 2.8 (41) 3.3 (48) 2.6 (38) 2.6 (38) 2.8 (41) 3.4 (49) Variant 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4) and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Tyre size 215/60 R 16 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4) and 2.2L 225/50 R 17 and 235/45 R 18 Duratorq-TDCi (DW) 263 Vehicle identification Note: The vehicle identification plate design may vary to that shown. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE B C Note: The information shown on the vehicle identification plate is dependant upon market requirements. D E F G A H I E135662 A Model B Variant C Engine designation D Emission level E Vehicle identification number F Gross vehicle weight G Gross train weight H Maximum front axle weight I Maximum rear axle weight The vehicle identification number and maximum weights are shown on a plate located on the lock side of the right-hand door aperture at the bottom. 264 Vehicle identification VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER E87496 The vehicle identification number is stamped into the floor panel on the right-hand side, beside the front seat. It is also shown on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 265 Capacities and Specifications TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle dimensions S-MAX Dimension description Dimension in mm (inches) Maximum length - without bumper styling kit 4772 (187.9) Maximum length - with bumper styling kit 4801 (189) Overall width including exterior mirrors 2154 (84.8) Overall height - EC kerb weight 1620 - 1660 (63.8 - 65.4) Wheelbase 2850 (112.2) Front track 1578 - 1588 (62.1 - 62.5) Rear track 1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2) Galaxy Dimension description Dimension in mm (inches) Maximum length 4819 (189.7) Overall width including exterior mirrors 2154 (84.8) Overall height - EC kerb weight without roof bars Overall height - EC kerb weight including roof bars 1709 - 1758 (67.3 - 69.2) 1770 - 1811 (69.7 - 71.3) Wheelbase 2850 (112.2) Front track 1578 - 1588 (62.1 - 62.5) Rear track 1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2) 266 Capacities and Specifications Towing equipment dimensions S-MAX A B C D F G H E75182 Item E Dimension description A Bumper – end of tow ball Dimension in mm (inches) 102 (4) B Attachment point – centre of tow ball C Wheel centre – centre of tow ball 1 079 (42.48) D Centre of tow ball – side member 438 (17.2) E Inner side of side member 876 (34.5) 267 16 (0.63) Capacities and Specifications Item Dimension description Dimension in mm (inches) F Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachment point 363 (14.29) G Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachment point 424 (16.69) H Centre of tow ball – centre 3. attachment point 636 (25.04) Galaxy A B C D F G H E75181 268 E Capacities and Specifications Item Dimension description Dimension in mm (inches) A Bumper – end of tow ball 101 (3.98) B Attachment point – centre of tow ball 16 (0.63) C Wheel centre – centre of tow ball D Centre of tow ball – side member 438 (17.2) E Inner side of side member 876 (34.5) F Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachment point 412 (16.22) G Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachment point 473 (18.62) H Centre of tow ball – centre 3. attachment point 685 (26.97) 269 1128 (44.41) Audio introduction IMPORTANT AUDIO INFORMATION WARNINGS Due to technical incompatibility, recordable (CD-R) and rewritable (CD-RW) discs may not function correctly. E66257 Disc labels Audio CD These units will play compact discs that conform to the International Red Book standard audio specification. Copy protected CDs from some manufacturers do not conform to this standard and playback cannot be guaranteed. Dual format, dual sided discs (DVD Plus, CD-DVD format), adopted by the music industry, are thicker than normal CDs and consequently playback cannot be guaranteed, and jamming could occur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with a scratch protection film or self adhesive labels attached should not be used. Warranty claims, where this type of disc is found to be inside an audio unit returned for repair, will not be accepted. E66254 MP3 All units except Sony CD (but not the 6CD) are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm audio compact discs only. The Sony CD unit will play 8 cm discs with a Sony approved adaptor fitted (CSA-8). E66255 The audio unit may be damaged if unsuitable items like credit cards or coins are pushed inside the CD aperture. Audio unit labels E66256 270 Audio unit overview 6000CD A C B Q D P E O F N G H M L K J I E141803 A CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 285). B On, off and volume control. See On/off control (page 276). C CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 287). D Clock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 275). E Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 279). F Folder up. G Folder down. H End call. See Telephone (page 292). I Information. See MP3 display options (page 289). J Seek up. See Station tuning control (page 280). K Seek down. See Station tuning control (page 280). L Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 278). M Accept call. See Telephone (page 292). N Menu. See Audio menu control (page 276). 271 Audio unit overview O Bass and treble control. See Bass/treble control (page 276). Balance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 276). P Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 278). Q Auxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 290). See Compact Disc Player (page 285). Sony CD and Sony CD DAB A B C E D F G S R H Q I P J E138370 O M N L K A Scan. See Station tuning control (page 280). See Compact disc track scanning (page 287). B Information. See MP3 display options (page 289). C Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 278). D CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 285). E Clock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 275). F DSP select. See Digital signal processing (DSP) (page 282). G Autostore. See Autostore control (page 278). H Menu. See Audio menu control (page 276). I Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 279). J On and off control. See On/off control (page 276). 272 Audio unit overview K Balance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 276). L End call. See Telephone (page 292). M Volume control, navigation buttons and select button. N Accept call. See Telephone (page 292). O Tone. See Bass/treble control (page 276). P Phone menu. See Telephone (page 292). Q Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 278). R Auxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 290). See Compact Disc Player (page 285). S CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 287). 273 Audio System Security SECURITY CODE The number of attempts will be shown in the display. Each unit incorporates a unique code that must be entered before the unit will operate. If the display reverts to CODE another entry attempt may be made immediately. If the display shows WAIT 30, the unit will be locked for 30 minutes. Wait until the timer counts down to zero. When CODE is shown in the display, enter the correct code. If the battery is disconnected or if the unit has been removed from the vehicle, the code must be re-entered before the unit will operate. Note: After 10 incorrect attempts the unit will be permanently inoperative and LOCKED will be shown in the display. See your dealer. LOST SECURITY CODE If you lose the unique code, contact your dealer and supply details of your audio unit along with some proof of identity. ENTERING A SECURITY CODE If CODE - - - -, CODE 0000 or ENTER KEYCODE appears in the display when you switch on the audio unit, you must enter the unique code using the station preset buttons. 6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB 1. Using the station preset buttons enter the unique code. 2. If you make a mistake entering the code, re-enter the digits by continuing to select buttons 0-9. The display will advance from digit position 1 to 4 and then back again. 3. Make sure that the complete code is correct before pressing either the * preset button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection. INCORRECT SECURITY CODE Up to a maximum of 10 unique code entry attempts are allowed with various consequences if you get it wrong. 274 Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays SETTING THE CLOCK AND DATE ON THE AUDIO UNIT Sony and Sony DAB 6000CD 1. Press the CLOCK button. 2. Press the left or right navigation button until the date or time value that you wish to change flashes in the display. 3. Using the up or down navigation button change the selected date or time value. 4. Using the left and right navigation buttons select additional date or time values that you wish to change. The selected value will flash in the display. 5. Repeat steps three and four as necessary. 6. Press the CLOCK button or the button between the navigation buttons to exit and save your settings. Changing the date and time Changing the date and time Press the CLOCK button to display the date and time. Note: If you do not press another button within 30 seconds of pressing the CLOCK button, the display will return to its previous setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Using the seek up or seek down button select the date or time value that you wish to change. The selected value will flash in the display. Rotate the volume control to change the selected date or time value. Using the seek up or seek down button select additional date or time values that you wish to change. Rotate the volume control to change the selected date or time value. Press the CLOCK button to exit and save your settings. 12/24 hour format 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Press the up or down navigation button until the 12/24 icon is shown in the display. 3. Using the left or right navigation button select the required setting. 4. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection. Note: If you do not press the CLOCK button within 30 seconds of changing a date or time value, the display will exit and save the new values automatically. Note: Press and hold the CLOCK button for more than two seconds to automatically select the hour value for winter or summer time adjustment. 12/24 hour format 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until the 12/24 icon is shown in the display. 2. Using the seek up or seek down button select your required setting. 3. Press the MENU button repeatedly or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. 275 Audio unit operation ON/OFF CONTROL BALANCE/FADE CONTROL Press the on/off control. This will also operate the unit for up to one hour with the ignition turned off. The balance function is used to adjust the sound distribution between the left and right speakers. The radio will switch off automatically after one hour. The fade function is used to adjust the sound distribution from front to rear in vehicles fitted with rear speakers. BASS/TREBLE CONTROL 6000CD The bass function is used to adjust the low-frequency response of the audio unit. Press the SOUND button four times for balance or five times for fade. The middle function is used to adjust the mid-frequency response of the audio unit. Use the volume control or on some units the seek up or seek down button to make the necessary adjustment. The treble function is used to adjust the high-frequency response of the audio unit. Sony and Sony DAB 6000CD Press the FAD/BAL button once for fade or twice for balance. Note: The selected level will be shown in the display. Use the up and down navigation buttons for fade adjustment, and the left and right navigation buttons for balance adjustment. 1. Press the SOUND button once for bass, twice for middle or three times for treble. 2. Use the volume control or on some units the seek up or seek down button to make the necessary adjustment. The selected level will be shown in the display. AUDIO MENU CONTROL Sony and Sony DAB Use the MENU button to access functions that cannot be selected directly via one of the control buttons. Press the MENU button for first level functions, or press and hold the MENU button for other second level functions (not available on Sony or Sony DAB audio units). Note: You can adjust these settings separately for CD, Radio and Aux. Note: The selected level will be shown in the display. 1. Press the TONE button once for bass, twice for middle or three times for treble. 2. Use the up and down navigation buttons to make the necessary adjustment. 276 Audio unit operation 6000CD Menu functions First level Second level During radio reception During tape playback During CD playback During all functions Manual tuning 12/24 hour Scan Traffic local or distant Scan tuning AVC Shuffle AF 12/24 hour ADV menu Repeat REG AVC - Comp News ADV menu - 12/24 hour CLIP - - AVC - - ADV menu * * ** VID * Bluetooth enable/ disable Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units and vehicles. Note: Second level functions (advanced) can also be entered by selecting ADV menu from the first level menu. * Automatic volume control. ** Alternative frequencies. Sony CD and Sony CD DAB Menu functions During radio reception During CD playback 12/24 hour 12/24 hour CLIP ON/OFF CLIP ON/OFF News ON/OFF News ON/OFF 1 AVC AVC 2 2 AF AF 277 1 Audio unit operation Menu functions During radio reception During CD playback 3 3 TA volume TA volume Traffic local or distant Traffic local or distant Regional ON/OFF Shuffle - Repeat - Comp ON/OFF Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units and vehicles. 1 Automatic volume control. 2 Alternative frequencies. 3 Traffic announcement. This can be repeated on each waveband and for each preset button. Sony CD and Sony CD DAB with Bluetooth Note: When you drive to another part of the country, FM RDS (Radio Data System) stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies are stored on the preset buttons. Pressing PHONE followed by the MENU button will access the following options: • No active phone or Active phone • Debond BT device • Reject calls ON/OFF • Bluetooth ON/OFF. WAVEBAND BUTTON Note: The selector can also be used to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source. STATION PRESET BUTTONS This feature allows you to store your favourite stations so that they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons. Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available. 1. Select a waveband. 2. Tune to the station required. 3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. The audio unit will mute. When sound returns the station has been stored. Note: This function will overwrite the previously stored autostore preset stations. AUTOSTORE CONTROL Note: This function can also be used to store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands. Note: The strongest signals available on the selected waveband will be stored. 278 Audio unit operation The sound is muted and AUTOSTORE will be shown in the display while the unit searches through the frequencies. If the traffic signal weakens, TP will flash in the display. Press the seek up or seek down button (the left or right navigation button on Sony or Sony DAB audio units) to find another station. When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets. Note: If this happens during CD or AUX playback or, on certain models, with the radio volume set to zero, the unit will retune automatically if the station is not available. 6000CD Press and hold the RADIO button. Press and hold the AST or RADIO button. If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA is turned off, then on again. TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non TA station no traffic announcement will be heard. Sony CD Local or distant traffic Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic programme information. The number of RDS or EON traffic announcements may become excessive in some areas so there is an option to select between local traffic information and all available information. Activating traffic announcements Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press the TA button. Either TA-D or TA-L will be shown in the display to indicate that the feature is switched on. 6000CD 1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes. 2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until TA is shown in the display. 3. Press the seek up or seek down button to select either local (TA LOCAL) or distant (TA DIST) traffic announcements. 4. Press the MENU button or allow the menu to time out to confirm your selection. If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be shown in the display. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic programme and display TP SEEK while doing so. If it cannot locate such a station, NOT FOUND will be shown in the display. TP will be shown within a box in the display when you are tuned to a station providing traffic information from a linked RDS (radio data system) or EON (enhanced other network) station. Note: Either TA-L or TA-D will be shown in the display. When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio, tape or CD playback and TRAFFIC or NEWS will be shown in the display. 279 Audio unit operation Sony CD STATION TUNING CONTROL 1. Press the MENU button and use the up or down navigation button to select the TA display. 2. Press the left or right navigation button to select your required setting. 3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection. DAB service linking Note: The DAB service linking is as per default off. Note: Service linking allows cross-referencing to other corresponding frequencies of the same station, for example FM and other DAB ensembles. Traffic announcement volume Note: The system will automatically change to another corresponding station if the current one becomes unavailable, for example when leaving the coverage area. Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes. Switching DAB service linking on and off To adjust the preset volume 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until DIGITAL RADIO SERVICE LINK is shown in the display. 3. Using the left or right navigation button select AUTO or OFF. 4. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection. 6000CD 1. Press and hold the TA button. 2. Rotate the volume control to make the necessary adjustment. Note: The selected level will be shown in the display. Sony CD 1. Press and hold the TA button. 2. Press the left or right navigation button to make the necessary adjustment. Seek tuning 6000CD Note: The selected level will be shown in the display. Select a waveband and briefly press the seek up or seek down button. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. Ending traffic announcements The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA during the announcement. Sony CD Select a waveband and briefly press the up or down navigation button. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen. Note: If you press TA at any other time it will switch all announcements off. 280 Audio unit operation Manual tuning Sony and Sony DAB 6000CD 1. Press the SCAN button. SCAN flashes or SCANNING is shown in the display. 2. Press the left or right navigation button to scan within a waveband. 3. Press SCAN again to continue listening to a station. 1. Select a waveband and press the MENU button until MAN is shown in the display. 2. Press the seek up or seek down button to tune up or down the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to. Sony CD Select a waveband and briefly press the up or down navigation button to tune up or down the waveband in small increments. The display shows the frequency selected. Sony DAB Note: Ensembles are groups of stations. Briefly press the up or down navigation button to move up or down the ensembles. Scan tuning The SCAN function allows you to listen to 10 seconds of each station detected. 6000CD 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until SCAN is shown in the display. 2. Press the seek up or seek down button to scan up or down the selected waveband. 3. Depending on the audio unit, press the seek up or seek down button or the MENU button to continue listening to a station. 281 Audio unit menus Changing the DSP settings AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL 1. Press the DSP button once for occupancy and twice for equaliser. For item location: See Audio unit overview (page 271). 2. Use the up and down navigation buttons to select the required setting. 3. Press the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection. When available, automatic volume control (AVC) adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise. All except Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until AVC is shown in the display. 2. Use the seek up or seek down button to adjust the AVC setting. 3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. AUDIO DISTORTION REDUCTION (CLIP) When available CLIP automatically detects sound distortion and reduces the volume level until the distortion has been eliminated. This means that whilst the display might change numerically when you raise the volume manually with the control, there may be no actual increase in sound. Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the MENU button briefly. 2. Using the up or down navigation button select AVC. 3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. All except Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes. 2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLIP is shown in the display. 3. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off. 4. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (DSP) DSP occupancy This feature takes into account the differences in distance from the various speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Select the sitting position for which the audio is to be correctly enhanced. Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the MENU button briefly. 2. Using the up or down navigation button select CLIP. 3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. DSP equaliser Select the music category that most suits your listening preference. The audio output will change to enhance the particular style of music chosen. 282 Audio unit menus 3. Using the seek up or seek down button select the required setting. 4. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES Many programmes broadcast on the FM waveband have a programme identification (PI) code, which can be recognised by audio units. Sony and Sony DAB If your radio has alternative frequencies (AF) tuning switched on and you move from one transmission area to another, this function will search for and switch to a stronger station signal, if one can be found. 1. Press the MENU button briefly. 2. Using the left or right navigation button select the required setting. 3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection. Under certain conditions, however, AF tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception. REGIONAL MODE (REG) When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and, if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and, if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency. Regional mode (REG) controls the behaviour of AF switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centred on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network caries the same programming. It will restore radio reception when it finds one or, if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. On certain units, NOT FOUND will be shown in the display. With AF-MAN selected, the unit operates in a similar way to AF-AUTO or AF-ON, but only searches for an alternative frequency when prompted by pressing a preset button. Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random' AF switches when neighbouring regional networks are not carrying the same programming. With AF-OFF selected, the original stored frequency remains selected. In this mode, AF-OFF will be displayed every time the unit is turned on. Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighbouring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause 'random' AF switches if they are not. All except Sony and Sony DAB All except Sony and Sony DAB 1. 1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes. 2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until AF is shown in the display. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes. 2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until REG is shown in the display. 283 Audio unit menus 3. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off. 4. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. 3. Press the button between the navigation buttons to make your selection. 4. Using the left or right navigation button turn the function on or off. 5. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection. Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the MENU button briefly. 2. Using the up or down navigation button select REGIONAL. 3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection. NEWS BROADCASTS Some audio units interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband or radio data system (RDS) and enhanced other network (EON) linked stations, in the same way as traffic information is provided. During news broadcasts, the display alternates between the station name and NEWS. News interrupts are broadcast at the same preset volume level as traffic announcements. All except Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press and hold the MENU button until NEWS is shown in the display. 2. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off. 3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection. Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until NEWS is shown in the display. 284 Compact Disc Player LOADING COMPACT DISCS LOADING THE COMPACT DISC CHANGER 6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB CAUTIONS Do not insert more than one disc into each slot. Always check that the CD aperture is empty before inserting a CD. Insert a CD, label side up, into the audio unit. Keep the door closed when the magazine is installed. LOADING, READING CD and AUDIO CD or MP3 CD will be shown in the display, and playback will start automatically. Note: The unit will only accept conventional CD's. TRACK SELECTION For item location: See CD changer (page 142). All except Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the SEEK UP button once to move to the next track or press it repeatedly to access later tracks. 2. Press the SEEK DOWN button once to replay the current track. If pressed within two seconds of the start of a track, the previous track will be selected. 3. Press the SEEK DOWN button repeatedly to select previous tracks. Sony and Sony DAB E66144 1. Press the up navigation button once to move to the next track or press it repeatedly to access later tracks. 2. Press the down navigation button once to replay the current track. If pressed within two seconds of the start of a track, the previous track will be selected. 3. Press the down navigation button repeatedly to select previous tracks. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the door. Press the button. Remove the magazine. Insert a disc, with the label facing upwards, into each slot. You will hear a distinct click to confirm correct loading. 5. Install the magazine in the direction indicated by the arrow on the magazine. You will hear a distinct click to confirm correct loading. 6. Close the door. 285 Compact Disc Player UNLOADING THE COMPACT DISC CHANGER FAST FORWARD/REVERSE All except Sony and Sony DAB CAUTION Press and hold the seek up or the seek down button to search forwards or backwards within the tracks on the disc. Keep the door closed when the magazine is installed. Sony and Sony DAB 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the door. Press the button. Remove the magazine. Pull the tray out using the lever on the side. 5. Remove the CD and close the tray. 6. Repeat steps four and five to remove remaining CD's. 7. Install the magazine in the direction indicated by the arrow on the magazine. You will hear a distinct click to confirm correct loading. 8. Close the door. Press and hold the left or right navigation button to search forwards or backwards within the tracks on the disc. SHUFFLE/RANDOM Random track playback, also known as shuffle, plays all tracks on a CD in random order. 6000CD Note: When SHUFF CD is selected only the tracks on the current CD will be shuffled. When SHUF ALL is selected the tracks on all the CD's will be shuffled. COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until SHUF is shown in the display. 2. Using the seek up or seek down button scroll through the display until SHUF ALL or SHUFF CD is shown in the display. 3. Using the seek up or seek down button select the next track to shuffle if required. Note: During playback, the display indicates the disc, track and time that has elapsed since the start of the track. Note: On CD changer audio units, if two or more CD's are loaded one after the other, playback will start with the last CD loaded. During radio reception, press the CD/AUX button once to start CD playback. Note: With the function on, SHUFFLE will be shown in the display as each new track is selected. Playback will start immediately after a disc is loaded. Compact disc changer playback Press the CD/AUX button twice to start CD playback. Note: If the CD/AUX button is pressed when no discs are loaded, NO CDS will be shown in the display. 286 Compact Disc Player Sony CD and Sony CD DAB COMPACT DISC TRACK SCANNING 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until SHUFFLE is shown in the display. 3. Use the left or right navigation button to switch the function on and off. The SCAN function allows you to preview each track for approximately 10 seconds. 6000CD Note: When selected, SCAN will be shown briefly in the display at the start of each track. Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, options include SHUFF CD for the whole CD, or SHUF ALL to play all the tracks in the folder in a random order. 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until SCAN is shown in the display. 2. Using the seek up or seek down button select either SCAN CD or SCAN ALL. 3. Press the seek up or seek down button again to continue listening to a track. COMPACT DISC TRACK COMPRESSION With this feature on, quieter music is boosted and louder music lowered to minimise repeated volume adjustments. Sony and Sony DAB Note: Various scan modes are possible, according to the type of CD currently playing. All except Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press MENU repeatedly until COMP is shown in the display. 2. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off. 3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection. 1. Press the SCAN button once to scan each track on an audio CD, or the first 10 seconds of each track on each folder of a MP3 CD. 2. Press the SCAN button again to select SCAN OFF (audio CD), or in the case of MP3 to scan each track within a folder. Sony and Sony DAB 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until COMP is shown in the display. 3. Press the button between the navigation buttons to make your selection. 4. Using the left or right navigation button turn the function on or off. 5. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection. EJECTING COMPACT DISCS Note: Radio reception is restored automatically when the EJECT button is pressed. Note: If the EJECT button is pressed in error, press the button again to cancel. Note: If the CD is not removed it will be pulled back into the audio unit. 287 Compact Disc Player 6000CD When a CD containing audio is inserted into the CD player the disc's directory structure is read in. It may take a while before playback starts and is dependant on the quality of the disc. Press the EJECT button at any time and remove the CD. Sony CD MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD in several ways. They can all be placed in the root directory like a conventional audio CD, or they can be placed in folders that may represent, for example, an album, an artist, or a genre. Note: If no CD is loaded when the EJECT button is pressed, NO CD will be shown in the display. Press the EJECT button at any time and remove the CD. EJECTING and PLEASE REMOVE will be shown in the display. 6000CD Press the FOLDER UP button to select the next music folder on the MP3 disc. REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS 6000CD Press the FOLDER DOWN button to select the previous music folder on the MP3 disc. 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until REPEAT is shown in the display. 2. Using the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN button choose between OFF and TRK. Sony and Sony DAB Sony and Sony DAB Playing a multi session disc 1. Press the MENU button. 2. using the up or down navigation buttons scroll through the display until REPEAT is shown in the display. 3. Using the left or right navigation buttons select REPEAT TRACK or REPEAT OFF. 4. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection. The normal playing sequence on CD's with multiple folders is to play the tracks in the first folder, then the tracks in any folders nested inside the first folder, then move onto the second folder, and so on. For example, if folder 1 has folders 1a and 1b within it, and folder 2 contains folder 2a, the playing sequence will be folder 1, 1a, 1b, 2, 2a. Use the up and down navigation buttons to select the next or previous music folder on the MP3 disc. When the playback of a file is finished the playback of the other files in the same directory continues. Directory change takes place automatically when all files in the current directory have been played back. Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, playback options are REPEAT TRACK, REP FOLDER and REPEAT OFF. MP3 FILE PLAYBACK Note: Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the CD player. The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files. 288 Compact Disc Player MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONS When an MP3 disc is playing, certain information encoded in each track can be displayed. Such information will normally include: • • • The file name The folder name ID3 information which might be the album or artist’s name. The unit will normally show the file name that is playing. To select one of the other items of information, press the INFO button repeatedly until the required item is shown in the display. Note: If the ID3 information selected is unavailable, NO MP3 TAG will be shown in the display. CD text display options When an audio disc with CD text is playing, limited information encoded in each track can be displayed. Such information will normally include: • • • The disc name The artist name The track name. Note: These display options are selected in the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISC NAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shown in the display if no information has been encoded. ENDING COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK Press the RADIO button. Note: This will not eject the CD; the disc will merely pause at the point where radio reception was restored. To resume CD playback, press the CD/AUX button again. 289 Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket Note: For optimum performance when using any auxiliary device set the volume on the device high. This will reduce audio interference when charging the device via the vehicle power supply socket. When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket permits an auxiliary device, such as an MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicle audio system. Output can be played through the vehicle speakers. To connect an auxiliary device, plug it into the AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mm conventional audio jack connector. Select the auxiliary input via the CD/AUX button and playback will be heard through the vehicle speakers. AUX will be shown in the display. Volume, treble and bass can be adjusted on the audio unit as normal. The audio unit buttons can also be used to restore playback from the audio unit, while the auxiliary device remains connected. 290 Audio Troubleshooting AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING Audio unit display Rectification CD ERROR PLEASE CHECK CD CDC ERROR General error message for CD fault conditions, for example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted. May also indicate a audio unit malfunction. Make sure that the disc is correctly loaded, clean and re- load the CD or replace the CD with a known music CD. See Ejecting compact discs (page 287). See Loading compact discs (page 285). If error continues. See your dealer. NO CD NO CDS NO CD # Message to indicate that the audio unit or CD changer is empty. Insert a CD. See Loading compact discs (page 285). HIGH TEMP CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until it has cooled down. SLOT FULL Message to indicate that the CD slot is already loaded. Eject the CD from selected slot before attempting load operation or select another slot location. See Loading compact discs (page 285). CDC FULL Message to indicate that the audio unit is full. See Ejecting compact discs (page 287). DATA CD An incompatible CD has been inserted, for example not an audio CD. See Ejecting compact discs (page 287). CODE ---- Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Entering a security code (page 274). WAIT Message to inform you to wait until the next keycode entry attempt can be made. See Incorrect security code (page 274). TRIES Message indicates the number of incorrect input attempts. See Incorrect security code (page 274). LOCKED Message to inform you that audio unit security system has locked the unit after repeated incorrect keycode entries. See your dealer. KEYCODE.... ENTER KEYCODE.... Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Entering a security code (page 274). INCORRECT Message to inform you that the entered keycode is incorrect. See Incorrect security code (page 274). 291 Telephone Note: If there is an ongoing call when the phone in use is selected as the new active phone, the call is transferred to the vehicle audio system. GENERAL INFORMATION CAUTION Using the system with the engine off will drain the battery. Note: Even if connected to the car system, your phone can still be used in the usual way. This section describes the functions and features of the Bluetooth mobile phone hands free system. Requirements for Bluetooth connection The Bluetooth mobile phone part of the system provides interaction with the audio or navigation system and your mobile phone. It allows you to use the audio or navigation system to make and receive calls without having to hold your mobile phone. The following are required before a Bluetooth phone connection can be made. 1. The Bluetooth feature must be activated on the phone and on the audio unit. Make sure the Bluetooth menu option in the audio unit is set to ON. For information on phone settings, refer to your phone user guide. 2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone, search for Ford Audio and select it. 3. Enter the code number shown on the vehicle display using the phone keypad. If no code number is shown on the display, enter the Bluetooth PIN number 0000 using the phone keypad. Now enter the Bluetooth PIN number shown on the vehicle display. 4. If your mobile phone asks you to authorize the automatic connection, select YES. Compatibility of phones CAUTION As no common agreement exists, mobile phone manufacturers are able to implement a variety of profiles in their Bluetooth devices. Because of this, an incompatibility can occur between the phone and hands-free system, which in some cases may significantly degrade the system performance. To avoid this situation, only recommended phones should be used. Please visit the website www.fordmobile-connectivity.com for full details. Note: A phone call will be disconnected if the audio unit is switched off. If the ignition key is turned to the off position the phone call will remain in progress. BLUETOOTH SETUP Before you can use your telephone with your vehicle it must be bonded to the vehicle telephone system. TELEPHONE SETUP Handling of phones After start up access to the phonebook list can be delayed for several minutes, depending upon the size. Phonebook Up to six Bluetooth devices can be bonded to the vehicle system. 292 Telephone Phonebook categories Select the phone from the active phone menu. Depending on your phonebook entry, different categories can be displayed in the audio unit. Turning the ignition and radio or navigation unit back on again, the last active phone is picked up by the system. For example: M Mobile O Office H Home F Fax Note: In some cases the Bluetooth connection must also be confirmed on the phone. Bond another Bluetooth phone Bond a new Bluetooth phone as described in the requirements for a Bluetooth connection. Note: Entries may be displayed without a category attachment. Phones stored in the system are accessible by using the phone list on the audio unit. The category can also be indicated as an icon: Note: A maximum of six devices may be bonded. If six Bluetooth devices have already been bonded, one of these has to be debonded in order to bond a new device. Phone E87990 TELEPHONE CONTROLS Mobile Remote control E87991 Home Voice, accept and reject button E87992 1 Office E87993 Fax E87994 Making a phone an active phone 2 E87662 When using the system for the first time, no phone is connected to the system. Bluetooth phone 1 Voice button 2 Accept and reject button The VOICE button is used to activate or switch off the Voice control. After bonding a Bluetooth phone to the system, this becomes the active phone. For further information refer to the phone menu. On vehicles with an accept and reject button, phone calls can be accepted and rejected by pressing the appropriate button. 293 Telephone Note: Some audio units have the accept and reject buttons on the front bezel. These operate in the same way. 5. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the selected phone number. Dialling a number using the address book - Sony radio USING THE TELEPHONE VEHICLES WITHOUT: NAVIGATION SYSTEM You can access your phone address book via Bluetooth. The entries will appear in the unit display. This chapter describes the phone functions of the audio unit. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the seek button until the phone book is shown. 3. Press the up/down arrow buttons to select the desired phone number. Note: Press and hold the up/down arrow buttons to skip to the next letter in the alphabet. Note: Refer to your audio guide for details of the controls. An active phone must be present. Even if connected to the audio unit, your phone can still be used in the usual way. Note: You can exit the phone menu by pressing any source button CD, AM/FM or AUX. 4. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the selected phone number. Making a call Dialling a number using voice control Dialling a number using the telephone keypad Phone numbers can be dialled using voice control. See Telephone commands (page 309). If you have an audio unit with a telephone keypad (buttons 0-9, * and #): 1. Press the call accept button. Press the PHONE button if you have a Sony radio. 2. Dial the number using the telephone keypad on the audio unit. 3. Press the call accept button. Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilst entering a phone number, press the seek left button to erase the last digit. A long press will erase the complete string of digits. Dialling a number using the address book You can access your phone address book via Bluetooth. The entries will appear in the unit display. 1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Keep pressing the MENU button until PHONEBOOK appears. 4. Press the seek buttons to select the desired phone number. Note: Press and hold the seek button to skip to the next letter in the alphabet. Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit. Ending a call Calls can be ended by pressing the call reject button. 294 Telephone Receiving an incoming call Audio units without a telephone keypad can also end a call by pressing either PHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF, or by pressing the MODE button on the remote control Accepting an incoming call Incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the PHONE button or the MODE button on the remote control. Redialling a number 1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select the CALL OUT list or the CALL IN list. On some audio units, select the MISSED, INCOMING or OUTGOING calls list. Note: If the active phone does not provide a call out list, the last outgoing call number/entry can be redialled. Rejecting an incoming call Incoming calls can be rejected by pressing the call reject button. Audio units without a telephone keypad can also reject a call by pressing either PHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF. Receiving a second incoming call Note: The second incoming call function must be activated in your phone. 4. Press the seek button on the audio unit. 5. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the desired phone number. If there is an incoming call whilst there is an ongoing call, a beep will be heard and you will have the option to end the active call and to accept the incoming call. Redialling a number - Sony radio Accepting a second incoming call 1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button. 2. Press the seek button until the desired list is displayed. Note: If the active phone does not provide a call out list, the last outgoing call number/entry can be redialled. Second incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the PHONE button, or the MODE button on the remote control. Rejecting a second incoming call Second incoming calls can be rejected by pressing the call reject button. Units without a telephone keypad can also reject a second incoming call by pressing the CD button, or the AM/FM button. 3. Press the up/down buttons to select the desired phone number. 4. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the phone number. Muting the microphone Redialling the last dialled number Sony radio During a call, it is possible to mute the microphone. Whilst muted, confirmation will appear in the display. 1. Press the call accept button. 2. Press the call accept button a second time to dial the number. 295 Telephone Audio units with green call accept button 1. Press the call accept button. Press the button once again to turn this function off. 2. 3. Audio units without green call accept button 4. Press the seek up or down button. Press the button once again to turn this function off. 5. Changing the active phone Press the PHONE or call accept button. Press the MENU button on the audio unit. Select the DEBOND option on the audio unit. Scroll through the different phones by using the seek buttons and display the phone to be debonded. Press the MENU button to select the phone which is to be debonded. Note: Phones must be bonded to the system before they can be made active. Debonding a bonded phone - Sony radio Using the station storage button A bonded phone can be deleted from the system at any time, unless a phone call is in progress. Note: This process is only for audio units without a telephone keypad. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until you reach the DEBOND option. 3. Scroll through the different phones by using the seek buttons and display the phone to be debonded. 4. Press the OK button to be debond. 1. Press the PHONE button on the audio unit. 2. Press the preset number required (using the station preset buttons 1 - 6). Using the audio unit menu Note: After bonding a phone to the system, this becomes the active phone. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. USING THE TELEPHONE VEHICLES WITH: NAVIGATION SYSTEM Press the PHONE or call accept button. Press the MENU button on the audio unit. Select the ACTIVE PHONE option on the audio unit. Scroll through the different stored phones by using the seek buttons to display the bonded phones. Press the MENU button to select the phone which is to be the active phone. This chapter describes the phone functions of the Navigation System. Note: Refer to your Navigation System guide for details of the controls. An active phone must be present. Even if connected to the Navigation System, your phone can still be used in the usual way. Debonding a bonded phone A bonded phone can be deleted from the system at any time, unless a phone call is in progress. 296 Telephone Making a call Accepting a second incoming call Dialling a number Second incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the MODE button on the remote control, the PHONE button on the unit or by using the ACCEPT option in the menu. Phone numbers can be dialled using voice control. See Voice control (page 299). Ending a call Note: This will cancel the ongoing call. Calls can be ended by pressing either the END button, the MODE button on the remote switch or the ON/OFF button on the navigation system. Rejecting a second incoming call Second incoming calls can be rejected by pressing either the call reject button, or one of the following buttons on the unit: CD, AM/FM. Redialling a number 1. Press the PHONE button on the unit. 2. Select REDIAL. Muting the microphone During a call, it is possible to mute the microphone. Whilst muted, confirmation will appear in the display. Receiving an incoming call Accepting an incoming call SD navigation units Incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the MODE button on the remote control, the PHONE button on the unit or by using the ACCEPT option in the menu. Press the mute button (symbol of a microphone with a line through it). Press the button once again to turn this function off. Rejecting an incoming call CD navigation units Incoming calls can be rejected by pressing either the call reject button, the CD or AM/FM buttons on the unit, or by using the REJECT option in the menu. Press the microphone mute button. Press the button once again to turn this function off. Changing the active phone Receiving a second incoming call Note: Phones must be bonded to the system before they can be made active. Note: The second incoming call function must be activated in your phone. Note: After bonding a phone to the system, this becomes the active phone. If there is an incoming call, whilst there is an ongoing call, a beep will be heard and you will have the option to end the active call and to accept the incoming call. 1. Press the PHONE button on the unit. 2. Using the BT SETTINGS option in the menu, select the active phone from the list. 297 Telephone Debonding a bonded phone A bonded phone can be deleted from the system at any time, unless a phone call is in progress. 1. Press the PHONE button on the unit. 2. Select the BT SETTINGS option in the menu. 3. Select the DEBOND option in the menu. 4. Select the phone from the list. 298 Voice control Do not try to give any commands until the beep tone has been heard. The voice control system will repeat each spoken command back to you. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION CAUTION Using the system with the engine off will drain the battery. If you are not sure how to continue say "HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if you do not wish to continue. Voice recognition enables operation of the system without the need to divert your attention from the road ahead in order to change settings, or receive feedback from the system. The "HELP" function provides only a subset of the available voice commands. Detailed explanations of all possible voice commands can be found on the following pages. Whenever you issue one of the defined commands with the system active, the voice recognition system converts your command into a control signal for the system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues or commands. You are guided through these dialogues by announcements or questions. Voice commands All voice commands should be given using a natural speaking voice, as if speaking to a passenger or on the phone. Your voice level should be dependant on the surrounding noise level inside or outside the vehicle but do not shout. Please familiarise yourself with the functions of the system before using voice recognition. USING VOICE CONTROL Supported commands System operation The voice control system allows you to control the following vehicle functions: The order and content of the voice controls are given in the following lists. The tables show the sequence of user voice commands and system responses for each available function. • Bluetooth phone • radio • CD Player/CD Changer • external device (USB) <> indicates a number or stored name tag to be inserted by the user. • external device (iPod) Short cuts • automatic climate control • navigation system - refer to separate navigation handbook). There are a number of voice command short cuts available, which allow you to control some vehicle features without having to follow the complete command menu. These are: System response • As you work through a voice session the system will prompt you with a beep tone each time the system is ready to proceed. • 299 Phone: CALL or DIAL NAME, DIAL NUMBER, and REDIAL. Phone: CALL FIRST NAME, LAST NAME at LOCATION. Example: Call Fred Bloggs at home. Voice control • • • • Name tag CD player or CD changer: DISC and TRACK. Automatic climate control: TEMPERATURE, AUTO MODE, DEFROSTING ON, DEMISTING ON, DEFROSTING OFF and DEMISTING OFF. Radio: TUNE NAME. External device (USB, iPod and SD card): TRACK. The name tag functionality can support the phone, audio and navigation features by using the "STORE NAME" function. You can assign name tags to items such as favourite radio stations and personal phone contacts. See Audio unit commands (page 300). See Telephone commands (page 309). See Navigation system commands (page 314). Start communicating with the system Before you can start talking to the system you first have to press the VOICE or MODE button for each operation and wait until the system answers with a beep. See (page 299). • Store up to 20 name tags per function. • The average recording time for each name tag is approximately 2-3 seconds. AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS Press the button again to cancel the voice session. CD Player You can control playback directly by voice control. Overview The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples. "CD PLAYER" "HELP" "PLAY" "TRACK" * "SHUFFLE ALL" "SHUFFLE FOLDER" ** "SHUFFLE OFF" "REPEAT FOLDER" 300 ** Voice control "CD PLAYER" "REPEAT TRACK" "REPEAT OFF" * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA. Track You can choose a track on your CD directly. Steps User says 1 "CD PLAYER" System answer "CD PLAYER" 2 "TRACK NUMBER PLEASE" "TRACK" 3 "" * ** "TRACK " * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4", "5" for track 245) Shuffle all To set random playback. Steps User says System answer 1 "CD PLAYER" "CD PLAYER" 2 "SHUFFLE ALL" CD Changer Overview The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples. 301 Voice control "CD CHANGER" "HELP" "PLAY" "DISC" * "TRACK" * "SHUFFLE ALL" "SHUFFLE CD" "SHUFFLE FOLDER" ** "SHUFFLE OFF" "REPEAT CD" "REPEAT FOLDER" ** "REPEAT TRACK" "REPEAT OFF" * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA. Disc If you have a CD changer you can choose the disc number. Steps User says 1 "CD CHANGER" System answer "CD CHANGER" 2 "DISC" 3 "" "DISC NUMBER PLEASE" * * Can be used as a shortcut. Track You can choose a track on your CD directly. 302 "DISC " Voice control Steps User says System answer 1 "CD CHANGER" "CD CHANGER" 2 "TRACK" 3 "" "TRACK NUMBER PLEASE" * "TRACK " ** * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4", "5" for track 245) Shuffle CD To set random playback within the CD contents. Steps User says System answer 1 "CD CHANGER" "CD CHANGER" 2 "SHUFFLE CD" Overview Radio The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu. The radio voice commands support the functionality of the radio and allow you to tune radio stations by voice control. "RADIO" "HELP" "AM" "FM" "TUNE NAME" * "DELETE NAME" "DELETE DIRECTORY" "PLAY DIRECTORY" 303 Voice control "RADIO" "STORE NAME" "PLAY" * Can be used as a shortcut. Tune frequency This function allows you to tune your radio by voice commands. Steps User says 1 "RADIO" "RADIO" 2 "AM" "AM FREQUENCY PLEASE" "FM" "FM FREQUENCY PLEASE" 3 "" System answer "TUNE " * * The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representative examples. • • • • • FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1 • • • • • "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9) "Ninety" (90.0) "One hundred point five" (100.5) "One zero one point one" (101.1) "One zero eight" (108.0) "Five thirty one" (531) "Nine hundred" (900) "Fourteen forty" (1440) "Fifteen zero three" (1503) "Ten eighty" (1080) Store name AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of 9 If you have tuned a radio station, you can store it with a name in the directory. AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1 Steps User says System answer 1 "RADIO" "RADIO" 2 "STORE NAME" "STORE NAME" "NAME PLEASE" 3 "" "REPEAT NAME PLEASE" 4 "" "STORING NAME" 304 Voice control Steps User says System answer " STORED" Tune name This function allows you to call up a stored radio station. Steps User says 1 "RADIO" 2 "TUNE NAME" 3 "" System answer "RADIO" "NAME PLEASE" * "TUNE " * Can be used as a shortcut. Delete name This function allows you to delete a stored radio station. Steps User says System answer 1 "RADIO" "RADIO" 2 "DELETE NAME" "NAME PLEASE" 3 "" "DELETE " "CONFIRM YES OR NO" 4 "YES" "DELETED" "NO" "COMMAND CANCELLED" Play directory This function allows you to let the system tell you all of the stored radio stations. Steps User says System answer 1 "RADIO" "RADIO" 2 "PLAY DIRECTORY" "PLAY " 305 Voice control Delete directory This function allows you to delete all stored radio stations at once. Steps User says System answer 1 "RADIO" "RADIO" 2 "DELETE DIRECTORY" "DELETE DIRECTORY" "CONFIRM YES OR NO" 3 "YES" "RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED" "NO" "COMMAND CANCELLED" Play This function switches the audio source to the radio mode. Steps User says System answer 1 "RADIO" "RADIO" 2 "PLAY" Auxiliary input This function allows you to switch the audio source to the attached auxiliary input device. Steps User says System answer 1 "EXTERNAL DEVICE" "EXTERNAL DEVICE" 2 "LINE IN" "LINE IN" Overview External devices - USB The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples. These voice commands support the functionality of an external USB device which may be connected to the audio unit. 306 Voice control "EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB" "HELP" "PLAY" "TRACK" * "PLAYLIST" "FOLDER" ** ** "SHUFFLE ALL" "SHUFFLE FOLDER" "SHUFFLE PLAYLIST" "SHUFFLE OFF" "REPEAT TRACK" "REPEAT FOLDER" "REPEAT OFF" * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General Information (page 317). USB play This function allows you to switch the audio source to the attached USB device. Steps User says System answer 1 "EXTERNAL DEVICE" "EXTERNAL DEVICE" 2 "USB" "USB" 3 "PLAY" USB Track You can choose a track on your USB device directly. 307 Voice control Steps User says System answer 1 "EXTERNAL DEVICE" "EXTERNAL DEVICE" 2 "USB" "USB" 3 "TRACK" 4 "TRACK NUMBER PLEASE" "" * "TRACK " * Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4", "5" for track 245) Overview External devices - iPod The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples. These voice commands support the functionality of an iPod which may be connected to the audio unit. "EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD" "HELP" "PLAY" "TRACK" * "PLAYLIST" ** "SHUFFLE ALL" "SHUFFLE PLAYLIST" "SHUFFLE OFF" "REPEAT TRACK" "REPEAT OFF" * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General Information (page 317). iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles list of your iPod directly. 308 Voice control Steps User says System answer 1 "EXTERNAL DEVICE" "EXTERNAL DEVICE" 2 "IPOD" "IPOD" 3 "TRACK" "TRACK NUMBER PLEASE" 4 "" * "TRACK " ** * Can be used as a shortcut. ** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2", "4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535. iPod playlist You can choose a playlist from your iPod directly. Steps User says System answer 1 "EXTERNAL DEVICE" "EXTERNAL DEVICE" 2 "IPOD" "IPOD" 3 "PLAYLIST" "PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE" 4 "" * "PLAYLIST " * Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General Information (page 317). Overview TELEPHONE COMMANDS The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples. Phone Your phone system allows you to create an additional phonebook. The stored entries can be dialled by voice control. Phone numbers stored by using voice control are stored on the vehicle system and not in your phone. 309 Voice control "PHONE" "HELP" "MOBILE NAME" "DIAL NUMBER" "DIAL NAME" * * * "DELETE NAME" "DELETE DIRECTORY" "PLAY DIRECTORY" "STORE NAME" "REDIAL" * "ACCEPT CALLS" "REJECT CALLS" * Can be used as a shortcut. Phone functions Dial number Phone numbers can be dialled after giving the name tag voice command. Steps User says 1 "PHONE" System answer "PHONE" 2 "DIAL NUMBER" "NUMBER PLEASE" 3 "" " CONTINUE?" 4 "DIAL" "DIALLING" "CORRECTION" " CONTINUE?" * * Can be used as a shortcut. 310 Voice control Dial name Phone numbers can be dialled after giving the name tag voice command. Steps User says 1 "PHONE" System answer "PHONE" 2 "DIAL NAME" "NAME PLEASE" 3 "" "DIAL " "CONFIRM YES OR NO" 4 "YES" "DIALLING" "NO" "COMMAND CANCELLED" * * Can be used as a shortcut. Redial This function allows you to redial the last dialled phone number. Steps User says System answer 1 "PHONE" "PHONE" 2 "REDIAL" 3 "YES" "DIALLING" "NO" "COMMAND CANCELLED" "REDIAL" "CONFIRM YES OR NO" * * Can be used as a shortcut. Mobile name This function allows you to access phone numbers stored with a name tag in your mobile phone. Steps User says 1 "PHONE" 2 "MOBILE NAME" System answer "PHONE" "MOBILE NAME" "" * * Can be used as a shortcut. 311 Voice control DTMF (Tone dialling) Note: DTMF can only be used during an ongoing call. Operate the VOICE button and wait for the system prompt. This function transfers spoken numbers into DTMF tones. For example, to make a remote enquiry to your home answering machine or to enter a PIN number etc. Steps Can only be used with vehicles installed with a dedicated VOICE button. User says System answer 1 2 "NUMBER PLEASE" "" Create a phonebook Store name New entries can be stored with the "STORE NAME" command. This feature can be used to dial a number by calling up the name instead of the full phone number. Steps User says System answer 1 "PHONE" "PHONE" 2 "STORE NAME" "STORE NAME" "NAME PLEASE" 3 "" "REPEAT NAME PLEASE" 4 "" "STORING NAME" " STORED" "NUMBER PLEASE" 5 "" "" 6 "STORE" "STORING NUMBER" "" "NUMBER STORED" Delete name Stored names can also be deleted from the directory. 312 Voice control Steps User says System answer 1 "PHONE" "PHONE" 2 "DELETE NAME" "NAME PLEASE" 3 "" "DELETE " "CONFIRM YES OR NO" 4 "YES" " DELETED" "NO" "COMMAND CANCELLED" Play directory Use this function to let the system tell you all stored entries. Steps User says System answer 1 "PHONE" "PHONE" 2 "PLAY DIRECTORY" "PLAY DIRECTORY" Delete directory This function allows you to delete all entries in one go. Steps User says System answer 1 "PHONE" "PHONE" 2 "DELETE DIRECTORY" "DELETE DIRECTORY" "CONFIRM YES OR NO" 3 "YES" "DIRECTORY DELETED" "NO" "COMMAND CANCELLED" Main settings Reject calls Calls can be set to be automatically rejected using voice control. 313 Voice control Steps User says System answer 1 "PHONE" "PHONE" 2 "REJECT CALLS" "ACCEPT CALLS" "REJECT CALLS" "ACCEPT CALLS" * * use this command to turn the reject mode off Overview NAVIGATION SYSTEM COMMANDS The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples. Please refer to your separate Navigation manual for details of the command menus. CLIMATE CONTROL COMMANDS Climate The climate voice commands supports the functionality of the fan speed, temperature and mode settings. Not all functions are available on all vehicles. "CLIMATE" "HELP" * "FAN" "DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" * "DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF" "TEMPERATURE" "AUTO MODE" * * * * Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN" shortcut is not available. 314 Voice control Fan This function allows you to adjust the fan speed. Steps User says System answer 1 "CLIMATE" "CLIMATE" 2 3 "‘FAN" "FAN SPEED PLEASE" "MINIMUM" "FAN MINIMUM" "" "FAN " "MAXIMUM" "FAN MAXIMUM" * * Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN" shortcut is not available. Defrosting/Demisting Steps 1 User says System answer "CLIMATE" "CLIMATE" "DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING * 2 ON" "DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING * OFF" "DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON" "DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING OFF" * Can be used as a shortcut. Temperature This function allows you to adjust the temperature. Steps User says 1 "CLIMATE" 2 "TEMPERATURE" 3 "MINIMUM" System answer "CLIMATE" "TEMPERATURE PLEASE" * "TEMPERATURE MINIMUM" 315 Voice control Steps User says System answer "" or "" "TEMPERATURE " "MAXIMUM" "TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM" * Can be used as a shortcut. Auto mode Steps User says System answer 1 "CLIMATE" "CLIMATE" 2 "AUTO MODE" "AUTO MODE" * * Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature or fan speed. 316 Connectivity The system supports a range of external devices, to fully integrate with your audio unit via the USB and auxiliary input sockets. Once connected, control of the external device is possible via the audio unit. GENERAL INFORMATION CAUTIONS Take care when handling external devices with exposed electrical connectors (such as the USB plug). Always replace the protective cap/shield when possible. There may be a risk of electrostatic discharge causing damage to the device. A list of typical compatible devices are shown below: • USB memory sticks • USB portable hard drives • Some MP3 players with USB connection • iPod media players (refer to www.ford-mobile -connectivity.com for latest compatibility list). Do not touch or handle the USB socket in the vehicle. Cover the socket when not in use. Only use USB Mass-Storage device compliant devices. Always switch your audio unit to a different source (for example the radio) before unplugging the USB device. The system is USB 2.0 full speed compatible, USB 1.1 host compliant and supports FAT 16/32 file systems. Do not install or connect USB hubs or splitters. Information on audio file structures for external devices USB Note: The system is only designed to recognize and read suitable audio files from a USB device that conforms to the USB Mass-Storage device class or an iPod. Not all available USB devices can be guaranteed to function with the system. Create only a single partition on the USB device. If playlists are created, they must contain correct file paths referenced to the USB device. It is recommended to create the playlist after the audio files have been transferred to the USB device. Note: It is possible to connect compatible devices with a trailing USB lead as well as those that plug into the vehicle USB socket directly (for example USB memory sticks and pen drives). Playlists must be created in .m3u format. Audio files must be in .mp3 format. Note: Some USB devices with a higher power consumption may not be compatible (for example some larger hard drives). Do not exceed the following limits: • 1000 items per folder (files, folders and playlists) • 5000 folders per USB device (including playlists) • 8 subfolder levels. Note: Access time to read the files on the external device will vary depending upon factors such as the file structure, size and device content. 317 Connectivity Connection To enable voice control for custom playlists and folders, follow the procedure below: • Create folders named with the structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is a number 1-10. For example "Ford3" without an extension. • Create playlists named with the structure "Ford<*>.m3u" where <*> is a number 1-10. For example "Ford5.m3u" without any space between "Ford" and the number. Plug in the device, and if necessary secure it to prevent movement within the vehicle. Connecting an iPod For optimum convenience and audio quality, we recommend that you purchase a dedicated single connection lead available from your dealer. Alternatively, it is possible to connect your iPod using the standard iPod USB cable and a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. If using this method preset the iPod volume to maximum and turn off any equalizer settings before making the connections: Thereafter, custom folders and playlists will be selectable with voice control. See Audio unit commands (page 300). iPod • To enable voice control for custom playlists, create playlists named with the structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is a number 1-10. For example "Ford7" without any space between "Ford" and the number. • Connect the headphone output of the iPod to the AUX IN socket. Connect the USB cable from the iPod to the vehicle USB socket. CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE - VEHICLES WITH: BLUETOOTH Thereafter, playlists will be selectable with voice control. See Audio unit commands (page 300). Connecting a Bluetooth audio device CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE CAUTION As various standards exist, manufacturers are able to implement a variety of profiles in their Bluetooth devices. Because of this, an incompatibility can occur between the Bluetooth device and the system, which in some cases may limit system functionality. To avoid this situation, only recommended devices should be used. WARNING Make sure the external device is securely mounted within the vehicle, and that trailing connections do not obstruct any of the driving controls. External devices may be connected using the auxiliary input socket and the USB port. See Auxiliary Input Socket (page 142). See USB Port (page 142). Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details. 318 Connectivity Bonding the device Information not available Note: Some audio and navigation units have a separate Bluetooth audio menu. Use this to access setup and control. E100028 Sony radio To connect the device to the system follow the same procedure as for Bluetooth hands free phones. See Bluetooth setup (page 292). Operation Select the USB device as the audio source by repeatedly pressing the CD/AUX button until USB appears in the display. After first connecting the USB device, the first track within the first folder will start to play automatically. Subsequently, following audio source switching, the position of playback on the USB device is remembered. Operating the device Select Bluetooth audio as the active source. Tracks can be accessed by skipping forwards and backwards using the steering wheel controls, or directly from the audio unit controls. To browse the device contents, press the up/down arrow key or the OK button once. The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below: • A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the folder view. • ">" after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example a folder named after an album, with individual album tracks within that folder). • "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable. • Icons to the left of track/folder text indicate the type of file/folder. Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons. USING A USB DEVICE Various icons are used to identify types of audio file, folders etc. USB device is the active source E100029 Folder E100022 Playlist E100023 Album E100024 Artist To navigate the USB device contents, use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through lists, and the left/right keys to move up or down within the folder hierarchy. Once your desired track, playlist or folder is highlighted, press the OK button to select playback. E100025 Filename E100026 Track title Note: If you wish to jump to the top level of the USB device contents, press and hold the left arrow key. E100027 319 Connectivity Audio control The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below: • A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the folder view. • ">" after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example a folder named after an album, with individual album tracks within that folder). • "<" to the left hand side of the display indicates that a further level up is readable. • Icons to the left of track/folder text indicate the type of file/folder. Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons. Press the left and right arrow keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks. Press and hold the left/right arrow keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content. Press the up/down arrow key or the OK button to browse the device contents. Press the MENU key to enter the USB menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here with respect to folders and playlists. Press the SCAN button to scan the whole device, current folder or a playlist if it is in operation. Press the INFO button to display the following: • filename • title • artist • album • track number and playing time. To navigate the USB device contents, use the rotary scroll/select button to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist or folder, or to commence playback of a particular track. Press ESC to go up one level. Repeated button presses will scroll through these displays. Audio control CD Navigation units Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks. Operation Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content. Select the USB device as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until DEVICES appears in the display. Select DEVICES and then select USB from the available device list. After first connecting the USB device, the first track within the first folder will start to play automatically. Subsequently, following audio source switching, the position of playback on the USB device is remembered. Rotate or press the SELECT button to browse the device contents. Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons to enable shuffle and repeat functions with respect to folders and playlists. Different options may appear depending upon whether or not a playlist is in operation. Press the SCAN button to scan the current playlist if it is in operation, or the complete USB device or folder. To browse the device contents, press the SELECT button once. 320 Connectivity Press the INFO button to display the following: • filename • title • artist • album • track number and playing time. • • "<" to the left hand side of the display indicates that a further level up is readable. Icons to the left of track/folder text indicate the type of file/folder. Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons. To navigate the USB device contents, use the scroll buttons to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist or folder, or to commence playback of a particular track. Press the left arrow key to go up one level. SD Navigation units Operation Select the USB device as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until the USB button appears to the left of the display. Select USB from the available device list. Audio control Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks. Note: Some devices may be shown but not selectable, depending if the device is connected or not. Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content. After first connecting the USB device, the first track within the first folder will start to play automatically. Subsequently, following audio source switching, the position of playback on the USB device is remembered. Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browse the device contents. Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons to enable shuffle and repeat functions with respect to folders and playlists. To browse the device contents, press the scroll up or down arrow button. Press the SCAN button to scan the current playlist if it is in operation, or the complete USB device or folder. The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below: • A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the folder view. • ">" after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example a folder named after an album, with individual album tracks within that folder). Press the INFO button to display the following: • filename • title • artist • album • track number and playing time. USING AN IPOD Various icons are used to identify types of audio file, folders etc. 321 Connectivity iPod is the active source The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below: • A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the list view. • ">" after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example all albums by a particular artist). • "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable. • An icon on the left side indicates the type of the currently displayed list (for example list of albums). Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons. E100030 iPod playlist E100031 iPod artist E100032 iPod album E100033 iPod genre E100034 iPod song To navigate the iPod contents, use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through lists, and the left/right keys to move up or down within the hierarchy. Once your desired track, playlist, album, artist or genre is highlighted, press the OK button to select playback. E100035 iPod generic category E100036 iPod generic media file Sony radio Note: If you wish to jump to the top level of the iPod contents, press and hold the left arrow key. Operation Audio control Connect the iPod. See Connecting an external device (page 318). Press the left and right arrow keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks. Select the iPod as the audio source by repeatedly pressing the CD/AUX button until iPod appears in the display. Press and hold the left/right arrow keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content. The iPod menu list for browsing contents will be available through the radio display. Navigation of the contents follows the same principles as for iPod standalone use (for example search by artist, title, etc.). To browse the iPod contents, press the up/down arrow key or the OK button once. Press the up/down arrow key or the OK button to browse the iPod contents. E100037 Press the MENU key to enter the iPod menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here. It is also possible to enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option directly from the top level. Press the SCAN button to scan the currently selected tracks. 322 Connectivity Press the INFO button to display the following: • title • artist • track number and playing time. To navigate the iPod contents, use the rotary scroll/select button to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist, album, artist, genre or to commence playback of a particular track. Press ESC to go up one level. Repeated button presses will scroll through these displays. Audio control CD Navigation units Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks. Operation Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content. Connect the iPod. See Connecting an external device (page 318). Select the iPod as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until DEVICES appears in the display. Select DEVICES and then select iPod from the available device list. Rotate or press the SELECT button to browse the iPod contents. Press the MENU key to enter the iPod menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here. It is also possible to enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option directly from the top level. The iPod menu list for browsing contents will be available through the display. Navigation of the contents follows the same principles as for iPod standalone use (for example search by artist, title, etc.). To browse the iPod contents, press the SELECT button once. Press the SCAN button to scan the currently selected tracks. Press the INFO button to display the following: • title • artist • track number and playing time. The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below: • A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the list view. • ">" after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example all albums by a particular artist). • "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable. • An icon on the left side indicates the type of the currently displayed list (for example list of albums). Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons. SD Navigation units Operation Connect the iPod. See Connecting an external device (page 318). Select the iPod as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until the iPod button appears to the left of the display. Select iPod from the available device list. Note: Some devices may be shown but not selectable, depending if the device is connected or not. 323 Connectivity The iPod menu list for browsing contents will be available through the display. Navigation of the contents follows the same principles as for iPod standalone use (for example search by artist, title, etc.). To browse the iPod contents, press the scroll up or down arrow button. Press the SCAN button to scan the currently selected tracks. Press the INFO button to display the following: • title • artist • track number and playing time. The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below: • A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the list view. • ">" after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example all albums by a particular artist). • "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable. • An icon on the left side indicates the type of the currently displayed list (for example list of albums). Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons. To navigate the iPod contents, use the scroll buttons to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist, album, artist, genre or to commence playback of a particular track. Press the left arrow key to go up one level. Audio control Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks. Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content. Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browse the iPod contents. Press the MENU key to enter the iPod menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here. It is also possible to enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option directly from the top level. 324 Navigation introduction ROAD SAFETY WARNINGS The system provides you with information designed to help you reach your destination quickly and safely. For reasons of safety, the driver should only program the system when the vehicle is stationary. The system provides no assistance with respect to stop signs, traffic lights, areas under construction or other important safety information. Do not use the system until you have familiarised yourself with its operation. Only view the system display when driving conditions permit. Safety information Read and follow all stated safety precautions. Failure to do so may increase your risk of collision and personal injury. Ford Motor Company shall not be liable for any damages of any type arising from failure to follow these guidelines. If detailed viewing of route instructions is necessary, pull off the road when it is safe to do so and park your vehicle. Do not use the navigation system to locate emergency services. To use the system as effectively and safely as possible, always use the latest navigation information. Your dealer will be able to assist with this. 325 Navigation system Installing the micro SD card GETTING STARTED CAUTION Using the system with the engine off will drain the battery. 1 Note: You will be charged when sending and receiving text messages. Note: Refer to your phone handbook for all phone functions and operation. 2 Note: Keep the activation code (printed on the installation guide) in a safe place. Note: Retain the activation text message in your mobile phone inbox. E114212 Compatibility of phones 1. Remove the micro SD card from the adaptor. 2. Insert the micro SD card into the mobile phone. CAUTION As no common agreement exists, mobile phone manufacturers are able to implement a variety of profiles in their Bluetooth devices. Because of this, an incompatibility can occur between the phone and hands-free system, which in some cases may significantly degrade the system performance. To avoid this situation, only recommended phones should be used. Activating the mobile phone navigation system Note: The radio must be switched on before connecting the mobile phone to the in-car GPS receiver. Note: The Ford Mobile Navigation must be installed and activated on your mobile phone. Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details. Note: It is possible to activate up to a maximum of three phones. Note: Detailed instructions are available on the micro SD card and at www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com. To connect the device to the system follow the same procedure as for Bluetooth hands free phones. See Bluetooth setup (page 292). 1. 326 Switch the radio on. Navigation system E114213 2. Switch your mobile phone on and start the "Ford Mobile Navigation". 3. Choose "Select Destination". 4. Choose "Enter Address". 5. Change route options if necessary and start the route guidance. 6. The vehicle display will show the turn information. Voice instructions are heard via the vehicle speakers. Note: Your mobile phone will display your current position. 7. You are able to exit the application and continue your route guidance after restarting the application. 327 Appendices www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity TYPE APPROVALS The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ford Motor Company is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. TYPE APPROVALS iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc. FCC ID: WJLRX-42 TYPE APPROVALS IC: 7847A-RX42 Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RX-42 - declaration of conformity E114214 We, the party responsible for compliance, declare under our sole responsibility that the Handset Integration product RX-42 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at: © 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved. 328 Appendices E114220 Certificate for United Arab Emirates TYPE APPROVALS EU Declaration Hereby, Valeo declares that this short range device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. E125209 329 Appendices ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY WARNINGS The RF (radio frequency) transmitter equipment (e.g. cellular telephones, amateur radio transmitters etc.) may only be fitted to your vehicle if they comply with the parameters shown in the table below. There are no special provisions or conditions for installations or use. WARNINGS Your vehicle has been tested and certified to legislations relating to electromagnetic compatibility (72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to ensure that any equipment you have fitted complies with applicable local legislations. Have any equipment fitted by properly trained technicians. Do not mount any transceiver, microphones, speakers, or any other item in the deployment path of the airbag system. Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes. Keep antenna and power cables at least 10 centimetres (4 inches) from any electronic modules and airbags. 1 2 3 4 E85998 Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) Antenna Positions 1 – 30 50 W 3, 4 30 – 54 50 W 1, 2, 3 68 – 87.5 50 W 1, 2, 3 330 Appendices Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) Antenna Positions 142 – 176 50 W 1, 2, 3 380 – 512 50 W 1, 2, 3 806 – 940 10 W 1, 2, 3 1200 – 1400 10 W 1, 2, 3 1710 – 1885 10 W 1, 2, 3 1885 – 2025 10 W 1, 2, 3 Note: After the installation of RF transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in the vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes. Check all electrical equipment: • with the ignition ON • with the engine running • during a road test at various speeds. Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside the vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements. 331 332 Index A Ashtray..............................................................137 Front ashtray.........................................................137 Rear ashtray..........................................................137 A/C See: Climate Control...........................................111 At a Glance........................................................10 About This Manual...........................................7 ABS Adjusting the steering wheel............................14 Autolamps...............................................................15 Automatic climate control.................................17 Automatic main beam control.........................15 Automatic transmission.....................................19 Autowipers...............................................................14 Blind spot information system (BLIS)..........16 Changing the wiper blades ...............................14 Diesel particulate filter (DPF)..........................18 Direction indicators...............................................15 Driver alert..............................................................20 Electric child safety locks...................................13 Electric folding mirrors........................................16 Electric parking brake (EPB) ............................19 Electric windows...................................................15 Engine idle speed after starting.......................17 Fuel filler flap..........................................................18 Information displays............................................16 Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive.......................................................................10 Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive........................................................................11 Keyless entry...........................................................13 Keyless starting......................................................17 Lane departure warning.....................................21 Manual climate control......................................16 Manual transmission...........................................19 Rear view camera................................................20 Reverse mirror dipping........................................16 Speed limiter.........................................................20 Towing the vehicle on four wheels..................21 See: Brakes...........................................................165 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes................................................................165 ACC See: Adaptive cruise control (ACC)..............181 Accessories See: Replacement Parts Recommendation..............................................7 See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............182 Active suspension.........................................173 Principle of Operation.......................................173 Active suspension See: Using active suspension.........................173 Adaptive cruise control (ACC).................181 Principle of Operation........................................181 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............182 Adaptive Headlamps....................................59 Cornering lamps...................................................60 Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With: Adaptive Front Lighting/Xenon Headlamps....................................................58 Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49 Adjusting the windscreen washer jets.....................................................................52 AFS See: Adaptive Headlamps................................59 Air Conditioning Audible Warnings and Indicators.............87 See: Climate Control...........................................111 Air Vents.............................................................111 Switching the chimes on and off...................87 Front air vents........................................................111 Second row air vents..........................................112 Third row air vents...............................................112 Audio Control..................................................49 Alarm..................................................................46 Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........282 Principle of Operation........................................46 Alternative frequencies.............................283 All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................282 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................282 All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................283 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................283 Audio introduction.......................................270 Audio menu control....................................276 Appendices....................................................328 Arming the alarm...........................................48 Arming the engine immobiliser................45 Sony CD and Sony CD DAB with Bluetooth.........................................................278 Mode.........................................................................49 Seek..........................................................................50 Audio System Security...............................274 333 Index Audio troubleshooting................................291 Audio Troubleshooting...............................291 Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays.........................................................275 Audio unit commands..............................300 Auxiliary Heater..............................................119 Changing the remote control battery..........122 Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on country).............................................................124 Feedback during starting and switching off.........................................................................122 Fuel operated heater (depending on country).............................................................123 Parking heater.......................................................119 Programming the transmitter........................123 Remote start in combination with direct start or timer....................................................122 Remote starting....................................................121 Auxiliary input.....................................................306 CD Changer...........................................................301 CD Player..............................................................300 External devices - iPod...................................308 External devices - USB....................................306 Radio......................................................................303 Audio unit menus........................................282 Audio unit operation...................................276 Audio unit overview......................................271 Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................77 Autolamps........................................................56 Automatic Climate Control........................114 Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket.............290 Auxiliary Input Socket.................................142 Auxiliary Power Points.................................137 Galaxy.....................................................................138 S-Max......................................................................138 Air distribution......................................................116 Blower......................................................................116 Mono mode...........................................................116 Rear air conditioning (triple-zone automatic climate control)...............................................117 Recirculated air.....................................................117 Setting the temperature...................................115 Switching the air conditioning on and off..........................................................................117 Switching the automatic climate control on and off...........................................................117 Windscreen defrosting and demisting........116 B Balance/fade control.................................276 6000CD................................................................276 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................276 Bass/treble control.....................................276 6000CD................................................................276 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................276 Battery connection points.........................251 Blind Spot Monitor.........................................79 Automatic Main Beam Control.................56 Blind spot information system (BLIS).........79 Detection errors....................................................80 System detection and alerts............................79 Turning the system on and off........................80 Using the system..................................................79 Activating the system.........................................57 Manually overriding the system......................57 Setting the system sensitivity..........................57 Automatic Transmission............................162 Bluetooth setup...........................................292 Drive modes..........................................................163 Emergency park position release lever....................................................................163 Hints on driving with an automatic transmission....................................................163 Selector lever positions....................................162 Handling of phones..........................................292 Requirements for Bluetooth connection.......................................................292 Bonnet Lock See: Opening and Closing the Bonnet.......232 Automatic volume control.......................282 Booster cables All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................282 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................282 See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle...................250 Booster Seats..................................................23 Autostore control.........................................278 Booster cushion (Group 3)...............................24 Booster seat (Group 2)......................................23 6000CD................................................................279 Sony CD.................................................................279 Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................244 Brakes...............................................................165 Autowipers.........................................................51 Principle of Operation.......................................165 334 Index Bulb changing Changing the Wiper Blades........................53 See: Changing a Bulb.........................................64 Rear window wiper blades...............................54 Windscreen wiper blades..................................53 Bulb Specification Chart..............................72 Checking the Wiper Blades........................53 Childminder Mirror........................................142 Child Safety......................................................22 Child Safety Locks.........................................28 C Capacities and Specifications................266 Technical Specifications.................................266 Cargo Nets......................................................198 Electric child safety locks..................................28 Manual child safety locks..................................28 Luggage retention net - type 1.......................198 Luggage retention net - type 2.....................200 Child Seat Positioning..................................24 Child Seats........................................................22 Car Wash Child restraints for different mass groups..................................................................22 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................248 Catalytic Converter......................................155 Cigar Lighter....................................................137 Cleaning the Exterior..................................248 Driving with a catalytic converter.................155 CD changer......................................................142 Changing a Bulb.............................................64 Body paintwork preservation........................249 Cleaning the alloy wheels..............................248 Cleaning the chrome trim..............................248 Cleaning the headlamps................................248 Cleaning the rear window..............................248 Approach lamp.....................................................66 Central high mounted brake lamp.................70 Daytime running lamps.....................................65 Front fog lamp and side lamp (Galaxy)..............................................................67 Front fog lamp and side lamp (S-MAX).............................................................66 Headlamp...............................................................64 Interior lamps.........................................................70 Luggage compartment lamp and tailgate lamp......................................................................72 Number plate lamp.............................................70 Reading lamps........................................................71 Rear lamp (Galaxy).............................................69 Rear lamps (S-MAX)..........................................68 Side repeater.........................................................66 Vanity mirror lamp................................................72 Climate Control...............................................111 Changing a Fuse..........................................220 Changing a Road Wheel...........................252 Compact Disc Player..................................285 Compact disc track compression..........287 Installing a road wheel....................................254 Jacking and lifting points................................252 Locking wheel nuts...........................................252 Removing a road wheel...................................253 Vehicle jack...........................................................252 All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................287 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................287 Cleaning the Interior...................................249 Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens, radio screens..................................................249 Rear windows.....................................................249 Seat belts.............................................................249 Principle of Operation.........................................111 Climate control commands.....................314 Climate...................................................................314 Clock..................................................................136 Coded keys.......................................................45 Cold Weather Precautions.........................217 Compact disc playback............................286 Compact disc changer playback.................286 Compact disc track scanning..................287 6000CD................................................................287 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................287 Changing the remote control battery.............................................................35 Connecting an external device................318 Remote control with a folding key blade....................................................................35 Remote control without a folding key blade....................................................................36 Connecting an external device - Vehicles With: Bluetooth..........................................318 Changing the Vehicle Battery...................251 General Information...........................................317 Connection............................................................318 Connecting a Bluetooth audio device........318 Connectivity....................................................317 335 Index Convenience features.................................135 Coolant Check Electric exterior mirrors................................76 Cruise Control.................................................179 Electric folding mirrors........................................76 Mirror tilting positions.........................................76 Reverse mirror dipping........................................77 Principle of Operation.......................................179 Electric Parking Brake.................................166 See: Engine Coolant Check............................243 Cruise control Applying the EPB................................................166 Applying the EPB when the vehicle is moving................................................................167 Automatic application of the EPB...............166 Cut in the power supply...................................168 Parking on a hill...................................................166 Preventing automatic application of the EPB......................................................................167 Releasing the EPB...............................................167 See: Using Cruise Control................................179 Cup Holders....................................................138 Seat back trays....................................................138 D Daytime Running Lamps............................56 Diesel Particulate Filter..............................149 Electromagnetic compatibility...............330 Ending compact disc playback..............289 Engine Block Heater....................................149 Engine Coolant Check................................243 Regeneration........................................................149 Digital signal processing (DSP).............282 Changing the DSP settings............................282 DSP equaliser......................................................282 DSP occupancy..................................................282 Checking the coolant level.............................243 Topping up............................................................243 Direction Indicators........................................61 Disabling the passenger airbag................33 Engine immobiliser........................................45 Disabling the passenger airbag.......................33 Enabling the passenger airbag.......................34 Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation switch...................................................................33 Principle of Operation........................................45 Engine Oil Check..........................................243 Checking the oil level........................................243 Topping up............................................................243 Disarming the alarm.....................................48 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.............................................................242 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)........................................................242 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)..............242 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)..............................................................242 Entering a security code............................274 Vehicles with keyless entry..............................48 Vehicles without keyless entry.......................48 Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45 Dog Guard.......................................................207 Installing the dog guard..................................207 DPF See: Diesel Particulate Filter..........................149 Driver Alert......................................................189 Principle of Operation......................................189 Driving Hints....................................................217 Driving Through Water................................217 6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................274 EPB Driving through water .......................................217 DRL See: Electric Parking Brake.............................166 Exterior Mirrors................................................76 See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................56 Manual folding mirrors.......................................76 E F Eco Mode.........................................................153 Principle of Operation.......................................153 Fastening the seat belts...............................31 Ejecting compact discs..............................287 Second row centre seat belt.............................31 6000CD................................................................288 Sony CD................................................................288 336 Index Fast forward/reverse..................................286 Getting started.............................................326 All except Sony and Sony DAB....................286 Sony and Sony DAB.........................................286 Activating the mobile phone navigation system...............................................................326 Compatibility of phones.................................326 Installing the micro SD card..........................326 First Aid Kit......................................................218 Floor Mats........................................................143 Fog Lamps - Front Glasses Holder................................................141 Global Opening and Closing.....................40 See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................57 Fog Lamps - Rear See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................58 Global closing.........................................................41 Global opening.....................................................40 Forward alert function...............................186 Glove Box.........................................................138 Adjusting the warning sensitivity.................186 Switching the system on and off.................186 Cooled glove box................................................138 H Front Fog Lamps.............................................57 Front Seat Armrest......................................134 Fuel and Refuelling......................................154 Handbrake Technical Specifications..................................157 See: Parking Brake.............................................165 Fuel Burning Heater Hazard Warning Flashers...........................60 Headlamp adjustment See: Auxiliary Heater..........................................119 Fuel Consumption........................................157 Fuel Consumption See: Technical Specifications.........................157 See: Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With: Adaptive Front Lighting/Xenon Headlamps........................................................58 Fuel filler flap.................................................155 Headlamp Levelling......................................58 Refuelling with a fuel can................................157 Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions.............................................................58 Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................154 Headlamp Washers.......................................52 Head Restraints.............................................128 Long-term storage.............................................155 Fuel Quality - E85........................................154 Long-term storage.............................................154 Adjusting the head restraint...........................128 Removing the head restraint..........................128 Fuel Quality - Petrol....................................154 Fuse Box Locations......................................219 Heated Seats..................................................133 Central fuse box..................................................219 Engine compartment fuse box......................219 Rear fuse box........................................................219 Heated Windows and Mirrors...................119 Fuses.................................................................219 Fuse Specification Chart............................221 Heated exterior mirrors......................................119 Heated windows..................................................119 Raising and Lowering the Temperature....................................................133 Heating Central fuse box.................................................225 Engine compartment fuse box......................221 Rear fuse box.......................................................227 See: Climate Control...........................................111 Hill launch assist (HLA) See: Using hill start assist................................170 G Hill Start Assist..............................................170 Principle of Operation.......................................170 Gauges...............................................................82 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................165 HLA Engine coolant temperature gauge..............83 Fuel gauge..............................................................84 Gearbox See: Hill Start Assist..........................................170 See: Using hill start assist................................170 See: Transmission..............................................162 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................35 337 Index I Introduction.........................................................7 iPod connection See: Connecting an external device............318 See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles With: Bluetooth..............................................318 Ignition Switch...............................................144 Immobiliser See: Engine immobiliser....................................45 iPod Important audio information..................270 See: Using an iPod..............................................321 Audio unit labels................................................270 Disc labels............................................................270 ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27 Incorrect security code...............................274 Information Displays....................................88 Attaching a child seat with top tethers........27 Top tether anchor points...................................27 General Information...........................................88 J Information Messages.................................101 Active suspension..............................................102 Airbag......................................................................102 Alarm.......................................................................102 Automatic main beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert.........102 Battery and charging system.........................103 Blind spot monitor.............................................103 Child power lock.................................................104 Climate control...................................................104 Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC).................................................................104 Doors open...........................................................104 Electric parking brake (EPB)..........................107 Engine immobiliser............................................105 Hill start assist.....................................................105 Keyless system....................................................105 Lighting..................................................................106 Maintenance.........................................................107 Message indicator...............................................101 Message symbols................................................101 Occupant protection.........................................107 Parking brake........................................................107 Power steering....................................................108 Stability control (ESP).....................................108 Start-stop.............................................................108 Transmission........................................................109 Tyre pressure monitoring system.................109 Viewing current messages...............................101 Voice control.........................................................110 Jump starting See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle...................250 Jump-Starting the Vehicle.......................250 To connect the booster cables.....................250 To start the engine.............................................251 K Keyless Entry.....................................................41 Disabled keys.........................................................43 General information.............................................41 Locking and unlocking the doors with the key blade............................................................43 Locking the vehicle..............................................42 Passive key..............................................................42 Unlocking the vehicle..........................................43 Keyless Starting............................................144 Failure to start......................................................145 Ignition on..............................................................144 Starting a diesel engine....................................145 Starting with automatic transmission....................................................145 Starting with manual transmission.............145 Stopping the engine when the vehicle is moving...............................................................146 Stopping the engine with the vehicle stationary.........................................................146 Keys and Remote Controls.........................35 Instrument Cluster.........................................82 Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................136 Interior Lamps..................................................61 L Lane Departure Warning............................191 Courtesy lamp........................................................61 LED Interior lighting..............................................61 Reading lamps.......................................................61 Vanity mirror lamps.............................................63 Principle of Operation........................................191 338 Index Lighting Control..............................................55 Manual Climate Control..............................112 Headlamp flasher................................................55 Home safe lighting...............................................55 Lighting control positions.................................55 Main and dipped beam......................................55 Parking lamps........................................................55 Air conditioning.....................................................113 Air distribution control.......................................112 Blower......................................................................113 Heating the interior quickly..............................113 Recirculated air.....................................................113 Ventilation..............................................................113 Lighting..............................................................55 Load Carriers Manual Seats.................................................125 See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............201 Adjusting the angle of the seatback...........126 Adjusting the height of the driver’s seat.....................................................................126 Adjusting the lumbar support........................126 Moving the seats backwards and forwards............................................................125 Load Carrying.................................................193 General Information..........................................193 Loading compact discs.............................285 6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................285 Loading the compact disc changer........................................................285 Load Retaining Fixtures............................203 Manual Transmission..................................162 Map Pockets..................................................140 Memory Function..........................................141 Installing the load bracket.............................206 Installing the load retaining fixtures..........204 Installing the luggage anchor points.........205 Recalling a stored seat position....................142 Resetting the memory......................................142 Setting a memory pre-set................................141 Locking and Unlocking.................................38 Message Centre Automatic relocking...........................................40 Central locking......................................................38 Double locking.......................................................38 Double locking the doors with the key.........38 Locking and unlocking confirmation............38 Locking and unlocking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control.................................................39 Locking and unlocking the doors from inside....................................................................39 Locking and unlocking the doors with the key.........................................................................38 Luggage compartment lid................................40 Reprogramming the unlocking function..............................................................40 See: Information Displays................................88 Mirrors See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............119 See: Windows and Mirrors................................74 MP3 connection See: Connecting an external device............318 See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles With: Bluetooth..............................................318 MP3 display options...................................289 CD text display options...................................289 MP3 file playback........................................288 6000CD................................................................288 Playing a multi session disc..........................288 Sony and Sony DAB.........................................288 Locks...................................................................38 Lost security code........................................274 Luggage Anchor Points..............................194 N Navigation introduction.............................325 Navigation system commands...............314 Navigation system.......................................326 News broadcasts.........................................284 Galaxy.....................................................................194 S-MAX....................................................................195 Luggage Covers.............................................201 M All except Sony and Sony DAB....................284 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................284 Maintenance..................................................232 General Information..........................................232 Technical Specifications.................................245 339 Index O Programming the remote control............35 Programming a new remote control.............35 Reprogramming the unlocking function...............................................................35 Occupant protection....................................29 Principle of Operation........................................29 Oil Check R See: Engine Oil Check......................................243 On/off control...............................................276 Opening and Closing the Bonnet...........232 Rear Fog Lamps.............................................58 Rear Quarter Windows.................................78 Closing the bonnet............................................233 Opening the bonnet..........................................232 Electric rear quarter windows..........................78 Manual rear quarter windows.........................78 P Rear Seats.......................................................128 Creating a level load floor................................132 Second row seats...............................................128 Third row seats....................................................130 Parking Aid.......................................................174 Manoeuvring with the parking aid................174 Switching the parking aid on and off...........174 Rear Under Floor Storage..........................197 S-MAX....................................................................198 Vehicles with a sliding loadspace floor.....................................................................197 Parking Aids.....................................................174 Principle of Operation.......................................174 Parking Brake.................................................165 Applying the parking brake.............................165 Parking on a hill...................................................166 Releasing the parking brake...........................166 Rear view camera.........................................176 Personalised Settings..................................99 Activating the rear view camera....................176 Deactivating the rear view camera..............178 Using the display.................................................177 Vehicles with parking aid.................................178 Principle of Operation.......................................176 Rear View Camera........................................176 Help screen, radio, navigation and phone information........................................................99 Language..............................................................100 Navigation information......................................99 Units of measure................................................100 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52 Intermittent wipe..................................................52 Reverse gear wipe................................................52 Washer.....................................................................52 Power Door Locks See: Locking and Unlocking.............................38 Refuelling - E85.............................................157 Refuelling.........................................................157 Regional mode (REG)...............................283 Power Seats....................................................126 2-way electric seat.............................................126 8-way electric seat.............................................127 All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................283 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................284 Power Steering Fluid Check.....................244 Topping up...........................................................244 Remote control battery Power Windows..............................................74 See: Changing the remote control battery.................................................................35 Anti-trap function.................................................75 Driver’s door switches.........................................74 Front and rear passengers’ door switches..............................................................74 Global opening and global closing................74 Opening and closing the windows automatically....................................................74 Resetting the memory of the electric windows..............................................................75 Safety mode...........................................................75 Safety switch for rear windows.......................74 Remote control programming See: Programming the remote control........35 Removing a Headlamp................................63 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............249 Repeat compact disc tracks...................288 6000CD................................................................288 Sony and Sony DAB.........................................288 340 Index Replacement Parts Recommendation..........................................7 Speed Control See: Cruise Control.............................................179 Speed Limiter.................................................187 Look for the Ford logo on the following parts .......................................................................8 Now you can be sure that your Ford parts are Ford parts.......................................................7 Principle of Operation.......................................187 Stability Control............................................169 Principle of Operation......................................169 Retractable tow ball....................................213 Starter Switch Driving with a trailer...........................................216 Maintenance.........................................................216 Swivelling the tow ball in.................................214 Swivelling the tow ball out..............................215 See: Ignition Switch...........................................144 Starting a Diesel Engine.............................148 Cold or hot engine..............................................148 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........144 Road Safety...................................................325 General Information..........................................144 Safety information............................................325 Starting a Petrol Engine - E85.................148 Roadside Emergencies...............................218 Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................201 Starting at low ambient temperatures ..............................................................................148 Installing the crossbars....................................201 Roof rack................................................................201 Starting a Petrol Engine..............................147 Cold or hot engine...............................................147 Engine idle speed after starting.....................147 Flooded engine....................................................147 Running-In.......................................................217 Brakes and clutch................................................217 Engine......................................................................217 Tyres.........................................................................217 Start-Stop........................................................151 Principle of Operation........................................151 S Station preset buttons...............................278 Station tuning control...............................280 Safety Precautions......................................154 Seat Back Trays............................................140 Seat belt height adjustment......................32 Seat belt reminder.........................................32 Steering Wheel Lock...................................146 DAB service linking...........................................280 Manual tuning......................................................281 Scan tuning...........................................................281 Seek tuning..........................................................280 Deactivating the seat belt reminder..............33 Vehicles with keyless starting........................146 Vehicles without keyless starting.................146 Seat belts Steering Wheel...............................................49 Storage compartments.............................139 See: Fastening the seat belts............................31 Seat memory function See: Memory Function.......................................141 Front storage compartments........................139 Overhead storage compartments...............139 Under floor storage compartment..............140 Under seat storage compartment...............139 Seats..................................................................125 Security code.................................................274 Setting the clock and date on the audio unit..................................................................275 Sun Shades.....................................................135 6000CD.................................................................275 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................275 Roof (Galaxy).......................................................135 Roof (S-MAX)......................................................135 Side windows.......................................................135 Shuffle/random...........................................286 6000CD................................................................286 Sony CD and Sony CD DAB............................287 Switching Off the Engine...........................149 Sitting in the Correct Position..................125 Sliding Loadspace Floor............................196 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Vehicles with a turbocharger.........................149 Symbols in this handbook...................................7 Symbols on your vehicle.......................................7 Storage compartment.....................................196 Snow Chains See: Using Snow Chains.................................259 341 Index T Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........................................................230 All vehicles...........................................................230 Vehicles with 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel (Stage V) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4) and 6-Speed Automatic Transmission....................................................231 Vehicles with automatic transmission, except 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel (Stage V) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4) with 6-Speed Automatic Transmission....................................................231 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications............266 Telephone commands..............................309 Create a phonebook..........................................312 Main settings........................................................313 Phone....................................................................309 Phone functions.................................................310 Telephone controls.....................................293 Remote control..................................................293 Telephone setup..........................................292 Bond another Bluetooth phone...................293 Making a phone an active phone................293 Phonebook...........................................................292 Phonebook categories.....................................293 Towing..............................................................210 Track selection.............................................285 Telephone.......................................................292 Traffic information control.......................279 General Information.........................................292 Activating traffic announcements...............279 Ending traffic announcements....................280 Local or distant traffic......................................279 To adjust the preset volume.........................280 Traffic announcement volume....................280 All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................285 Sony and Sony DAB..........................................285 Telephone See: Using the telephone - Vehicles With: Navigation System.......................................296 See: Using the telephone - Vehicles Without: Navigation System.......................................294 Transmission..................................................162 Trip Computer..................................................97 Temporary Mobility Kit..............................255 Average fuel consumption................................97 Average speed.......................................................97 Distance to empty................................................97 Odometer................................................................97 Outside air temperature....................................97 Tripmeter.................................................................97 Type 1 and 2............................................................98 Type 3.......................................................................98 Checking the tyre pressure............................258 General information.........................................255 Inflating the tyre.................................................256 Using the tyre repair kit...................................256 Tow Ball...........................................................210 Driving with a trailer...........................................212 Driving without a trailer....................................213 Inserting the tow ball arm................................211 Maintenance.........................................................213 Removing the tow ball arm.............................212 Unlocking the tow ball arm mechanism.......................................................211 Type approvals.............................................328 Certificate for United Arab Emirates..........329 EU Declaration....................................................329 FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............328 RX-42 - declaration of conformity..............328 Towing a Trailer.............................................210 Towing Points...............................................230 Tyre Care.........................................................259 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..........259 Installing the towing eye.................................230 Towing eye location..........................................230 Checking the tyre pressures..........................260 Setting the vehicle load..................................260 Steep gradients...................................................210 Tyre Pressures See: Technical Specifications........................261 Tyre Repair Kit See: Temporary Mobility Kit...........................255 Tyres See: Wheels and Tyres.....................................252 342 Index U Using driver alert..........................................189 Resetting the system........................................190 Switching the system on and off.................189 System display....................................................190 System warnings................................................189 Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................238 Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma).............................................234 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4).....................................235 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................239 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)...................................................236 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..................241 Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4).....................................237 Unloading the compact disc changer........................................................286 USB Port...........................................................142 USB Using Eco mode............................................153 Resetting Eco mode..........................................153 Using hill start assist...................................170 Activating the HLA...............................................171 Deactivating the HLA.........................................172 Using lane departure warning..................191 Setting the steering wheel vibration level.....................................................................192 Setting the system sensitivity........................192 Switching the system on and off...................191 System warnings................................................192 Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33 Using Snow Chains.....................................259 Vehicles with stability control (ESP).........259 Using Stability Control...............................169 Selecting a setting..............................................173 System malfunction...........................................173 Vehicles without stability control (ESP) switch.................................................................169 Vehicles with stability control (ESP) switch.................................................................169 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................182 Using start-stop.............................................151 Automatic deactivation...................................185 Changing the set speed...................................183 Setting a speed...................................................183 Setting the vehicle gap....................................184 Switching the system off.................................185 Switching the system on.................................183 Temporarily deactivating the system.........185 To re-start the engine........................................152 To stop the engine...............................................151 See: Using a USB device..................................319 Using active suspension.............................173 Using the speed limiter...............................187 Intentionally exceeding the speed limit.....................................................................187 Setting the speed limit.....................................187 System warnings................................................188 Using the telephone - Vehicles With: Navigation System...................................296 Using an iPod..................................................321 CD Navigation units..........................................323 SD Navigation units...........................................323 Sony radio.............................................................322 Changing the active phone............................297 Debonding a bonded phone.........................298 Making a call........................................................297 Muting the microphone...................................297 Receiving an incoming call.............................297 Receiving a second incoming call................297 Using a USB device......................................319 CD Navigation units..........................................320 SD Navigation units............................................321 Sony radio..............................................................319 Using Cruise Control....................................179 Cancelling the set speed..................................179 Changing the set speed....................................179 Resuming the set speed..................................180 Setting a speed....................................................179 Switching cruise control off...........................180 Switching cruise control on.............................179 343 Index W Using the telephone - Vehicles Without: Navigation System...................................294 Changing the active phone............................296 Debonding a bonded phone.........................296 Debonding a bonded phone - Sony radio...................................................................296 Making a call.......................................................294 Muting the microphone...................................295 Receiving an incoming call............................295 Receiving a second incoming call...............295 Warning Lamps and Indicators................84 ABS warning lamp...............................................84 Airbag warning lamp..........................................84 Blind spot monitor indicator............................84 Brake system lamp..............................................84 Coolant temperature warning lamp.............84 Direction indicators.............................................85 Electric parking brake (EPB) warning lamp.....................................................................85 Engine warning lamp..........................................85 Forward alert indicator......................................85 Front fog lamp indicator....................................85 Frost warning lamp.............................................85 Glow plug indicator.............................................85 Headlamp indicator............................................85 Ignition warning lamp........................................85 Lane departure warning indicator.................86 Low fuel level warning lamp............................86 Main beam indicator...........................................86 Message indicator...............................................86 Oil pressure warning lamp...............................86 Rear fog lamp indicator.....................................86 Seat belt reminder...............................................86 Shift indicator........................................................86 Stability control (ESP) warning lamp..........86 Start-stop indicator............................................86 Using voice control.....................................299 Name tag.............................................................300 System operation..............................................299 Using Winter Tyres......................................259 V Vehicle battery.............................................250 Vehicle Care...................................................248 Vehicle Identification Number................265 Vehicle Identification Plate......................264 Vehicle identification.................................264 Vehicle recovery...........................................230 Ventilated Seats............................................133 Raising and Lowering the Temperature....................................................134 Ventilation See: Climate Control...........................................111 Vents Warning Triangle...........................................218 Washer Fluid Check....................................245 Washers See: Air Vents.........................................................111 VIN See: Vehicle Identification Number............265 See: Wipers and Washers..................................51 Voice control.................................................299 Washing Principle of Operation......................................299 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................248 Waveband button........................................278 Wheels and Tyres........................................252 General Information..........................................252 Technical Specifications..................................261 Windows and Mirrors....................................74 Windscreen Washers....................................52 Windscreen Wipers........................................51 Intermittent wipe...................................................51 Winter Tyres See: Using Winter Tyres..................................259 Wipers and Washers......................................51 Technical Specifications...................................54 344 CG3533en